Aspen Dynamics™ 12.

Reference Guide
Version: 12.1

August 2003
Copyright © 2003 by Aspen Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.

AspenTech product names that are mentioned in this manual, e.g., Aspen Dynamics™, Aspen Custom Modeler®,
Aspen Plus™, Enterprise Optimization and the aspen leaf logo are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Aspen Technology, Inc., Cambridge, MA.

All other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.
This manual is intended as a guide to using AspenTech's software. This documentation contains AspenTech
proprietary and confidential information and may not be disclosed, used, or copied without the prior consent of
AspenTech or as set forth in the applicable license agreement. Users are solely responsible for the proper use of the
software and the application of the results obtained.

Although AspenTech has tested the software and reviewed the documentation, the sole warranty for the software
may be found in the applicable license agreement between AspenTech and the user. ASPENTECH MAKES NO
WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT TO THIS
DOCUMENTATION, ITS QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

Corporate
Aspen Technology, Inc.
Ten Canal Park
Cambridge, MA 02141-2201
USA
Phone: (1) (617) 949-1000
Fax: (1) (617) 949-1030
URL: http://www.aspentech.com/
Contents
Introduction ix
About This Guide............................................................................................................... ix
Associated Guides.............................................................................................................. ix
What You Need To Use This Guide ....................................................................................x
For More Information ..........................................................................................................x
Online Help..............................................................................................................x
Printing the Portable Document Format Files (PDFs)........................................... xi
World Wide Web ................................................................................................... xi
Technical Support .................................................................................................. xi

1 Streams 1-1
MaterialStream in Dynamic Simulations......................................................................... 1-2
Reverse Flow for Material Stream in Dynamic Simulations ............................... 1-2
Specifying MaterialStream Feeds for Dynamic Simulations .............................. 1-3
Using the Stream Sensor...................................................................................... 1-3
HeatStream in Dynamic Simulations............................................................................... 1-5
Specifying HeatStream Feeds for Dynamic Simulations..................................... 1-6
WorkStream in Dynamic Simulations ............................................................................. 1-6
Specifying WorkStream Feeds for Dynamic Simulations ................................... 1-6

2 Mixers and Splitters 2-1

Mixer in Dynamic Simulations........................................................................................ 2-2
Reverse Flow for Mixer in Dynamic Simulations ............................................... 2-4
Specifying Mixer for Dynamic Simulations ........................................................ 2-5
FSplit in Dynamic Simulations........................................................................................ 2-7
Reverse Flow for FSplit in Dynamic Simulations ............................................... 2-7

3 Separators 3-1
Flash2 in Dynamic Simulations ....................................................................................... 3-2
Reverse Flow for Flash2 in Dynamic Simulations .............................................. 3-4
Specifying Flash2 for Dynamic Simulations ....................................................... 3-4
Flash3 in Dynamic Simulations ....................................................................................... 3-8
Reverse Flow for Flash3 in Dynamic Simulations ............................................ 3-10
Specifying Flash3 for Dynamic Simulations ..................................................... 3-11
Decanter in Dynamic Simulations ................................................................................. 3-15
Reverse Flow for Decanter in Dynamic Simulations ........................................ 3-17

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Contents • i

 Specifying Decanter for Dynamic Simulations ................................................. 3-18
Sep in Dynamic Simulations.......................................................................................... 3-19
Sep2 in Dynamic Simulations........................................................................................ 3-20

4 Heat Exchangers 4-1

Heater in Dynamic Simulations ....................................................................................... 4-2
Pressure/Flow Effects for Heater ......................................................................... 4-2
Reverse Flow for Heater in Dynamic Simulations .............................................. 4-2
Specifying Heat Transfer for Heater in Dynamic Simulations............................ 4-3
HeatX in Dynamic Simulations ....................................................................................... 4-3
Reverse Flow for HeatX in Dynamic Simulations .............................................. 4-7
Specifying HeatX for Dynamic Simulations ....................................................... 4-8
MHeatX in Dynamic Simulations.................................................................................... 4-9
Reverse Flow for MHeatX in Dynamic Simulations......................................... 4-10
Specifying MHeatX in Dynamic Simulations ................................................... 4-11

5 Columns 5-1
Distl in Dynamic Simulations.......................................................................................... 5-2
Specifying Distl for Dynamic Simulations .......................................................... 5-2
References for Distl ......................................................................................................... 5-2
Extract in Dynamic Simulations ...................................................................................... 5-3
Specifying Extract for Dynamic Simulations ...................................................... 5-3
RadFrac in Dynamic Simulations .................................................................................... 5-4
Pressure/Flow Effects for RadFrac ...................................................................... 5-5
Pressure and Level Control for RadFrac.............................................................. 5-8
Specifying RadFrac for Pressure Relief............................................................. 5-13
Specifying RadFrac Overall Heat Transfer Coefficient .................................... 5-13
Specifying RadFrac for Dynamic Simulations .................................................. 5-15
Changing RadFrac Operating Specifications..................................................... 5-20
Simulating Column Startup ............................................................................... 5-22
References for RadFrac ..................................................................................... 5-23
PetroFrac in Dynamic Simulations ................................................................................ 5-24
Pressure/Flow Effects for PetroFrac .................................................................. 5-26
Pressure and Level Control for PetroFrac.......................................................... 5-28
Specifying PetroFrac for Pressure Relief........................................................... 5-32
Specifying PetroFrac Overall Heat Transfer Coefficient .................................. 5-32
Specifying PetroFrac for Dynamic Simulations ................................................ 5-34
References for PetroFrac ................................................................................... 5-39
Column Hydraulic and Pressure Drop Equations .......................................................... 5-40

ii • Contents Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

6 Reactors 6-1
Reaction Kinetics of Rate-Based Reactions .................................................................... 6-2
Power Law Kinetic Model ................................................................................... 6-2
Langmuir-Hinshelwood-Hougen-Watson (LHHW) Kinetic Model.................... 6-3
RStoic in Dynamic Simulations....................................................................................... 6-5
Specifying RStoic for Dynamic Simulations....................................................... 6-7
RYield in Dynamic Simulations ...................................................................................... 6-9
Specifying RYield for Dynamic Simulations .................................................... 6-10
RGibbs in Dynamic Simulations ................................................................................... 6-13
Specifying RGibbs for Dynamic Simulations.................................................... 6-15
RCSTR in Dynamic Simulations ................................................................................... 6-17
Reverse Flow for RCSTR in Dynamic Simulations .......................................... 6-20
Specifying RCSTR for Dynamic Simulations ................................................... 6-20
Specifying the Pressure Relief RCSTR Model.................................................. 6-22
Initializing the RCSTR Model........................................................................... 6-26
Displaying Results for RCSTR Model .............................................................. 6-30
Using Your Own Fortran in RCSTR Dynamic Simulations.............................. 6-30
Additional Equations for the RCSTR Model..................................................... 6-31
RPlug in Dynamic Simulations...................................................................................... 6-33
Cooling Options for RPlug ................................................................................ 6-33
Pressure/Flow Effects for RPlug........................................................................ 6-34
Using Your Own Fortran in RPlug Dynamic Simulations ................................ 6-35
Modeling RPlug in Aspen Plus and Aspen Dynamics ...................................... 6-35
Specifying RPlug for Dynamic Simulations...................................................... 6-36

7 Pressure Changers 7-1

Compr in Dynamic Simulations....................................................................................... 7-2
Pressure/Flow Effects for Compr......................................................................... 7-2
Using Performance Curves for Compr ................................................................ 7-2
Specifying Compr for Dynamic Simulations....................................................... 7-4
MCompr in Dynamic Simulations ................................................................................... 7-4
Pressure/Flow Effects for MCompr ..................................................................... 7-5
Using Performance Curves for MCompr............................................................. 7-5
Specifying MCompr for Dynamic Simulations ................................................... 7-7
Pump in Dynamic Simulations ........................................................................................ 7-7
Valve in Dynamic Simulations ...................................................................................... 7-12
Modeling Details................................................................................................ 7-14
Simple Valve Model .......................................................................................... 7-16
Valve Dynamics................................................................................................. 7-16
Specifying the Valve Dynamics for Valve .................................................................... 7-17
ValveDynamics.................................................................................................. 7-17
Equations for Valve Dynamics .......................................................................... 7-17
Configuring Valve Dynamics .......................................................................... 7-18
Pipe in Dynamic Simulations ........................................................................................ 7-21

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Contents • iii

 Reverse Flow for Pipe in Dynamic Simulations................................................ 7-22
Specifying Pipe for Dynamic Simulations......................................................... 7-23
Modeling Pressure Relief Systems with Pipe .................................................... 7-24
Initializing the Pipe Model ................................................................................ 7-26
What Does the Initialize Button Do?................................................................. 7-26
Displaying Results for the Pipe Model .............................................................. 7-27
Equations for the Pipe Model ............................................................................ 7-28

8 Stream Manipulators 8-1

Dupl in Dynamic Simulations.......................................................................................... 8-2
Pressure/Flow Effects for Dupl............................................................................ 8-2
Mult in Dynamic Simulations.......................................................................................... 8-2
Pressure/Flow Effects for Mult............................................................................ 8-2
Reverse flow for Mult in Dynamic Simulations .................................................. 8-2
Selector in Dynamic Simulations .................................................................................... 8-2
Pressure/Flow Effects for Selector ...................................................................... 8-2

9 Control Models 9-1

Time Units in Control Models ......................................................................................... 9-2
Comparator ...................................................................................................................... 9-2
Comparator Equation ........................................................................................... 9-2
Configuring Comparator...................................................................................... 9-2
Dead_time ........................................................................................................................ 9-3
Dead_time Equation ............................................................................................ 9-3
Configuring Dead_time ....................................................................................... 9-3
Discretize ......................................................................................................................... 9-3
Discretize Equations ............................................................................................ 9-3
Configuring Discretize......................................................................................... 9-4
FeedForward .................................................................................................................... 9-4
FeedForward Equations ....................................................................................... 9-5
Configuring FeedForward.................................................................................... 9-6
HiLoSelect ....................................................................................................................... 9-6
HiLoSelect Equations .......................................................................................... 9-6
Configuring HiLoSelect....................................................................................... 9-7
IAE................................................................................................................................... 9-7
IAE Equation ....................................................................................................... 9-7
Configuring IAE .................................................................................................. 9-8
ISE ................................................................................................................................... 9-8
ISE Equation ........................................................................................................ 9-8
Configuring ISE ................................................................................................... 9-9
Lag_1 ............................................................................................................................... 9-9
Lag_1 Equations .................................................................................................. 9-9
Configuring Lag_1............................................................................................... 9-9
Lead_lag......................................................................................................................... 9-10
Lead_lag Equations............................................................................................ 9-10

iv • Contents Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 Configuring Lead_lag ........................................................................................ 9-11
Multiply ......................................................................................................................... 9-12
Multiply Equations ............................................................................................ 9-12
Configuring Multiply......................................................................................... 9-12
Noise .............................................................................................................................. 9-12
Noise Equations ................................................................................................. 9-12
Configuring Noise.............................................................................................. 9-13
PID ................................................................................................................................. 9-14
PID Algorithms.................................................................................................. 9-23
PID Controller Faceplates.................................................................................. 9-25
Closed-Loop Controller Tuning using the Ziegler-Nichols Technique............. 9-26
Using the ISE and IAE Models with a PID Controller...................................... 9-27
PIDIncr........................................................................................................................... 9-28
PID Algorithms.................................................................................................. 9-36
Anti Reset Windup............................................................................................. 9-37
PIDIncr Controller Faceplates ........................................................................... 9-38
Automatic Controller Tuning Context............................................................... 9-40
Using Automatic Controller Tuning .................................................................. 9-40
Using the ISE and IAE Models with the PIDIncr Controller ............................ 9-44
PRBS.............................................................................................................................. 9-45
PRBS Equations................................................................................................. 9-45
Configuring PRBS ............................................................................................. 9-46
Ratio............................................................................................................................... 9-47
Ratio Equations.................................................................................................. 9-47
Configuring Ratio .............................................................................................. 9-47
Scale............................................................................................................................... 9-48
Scale Equations.................................................................................................. 9-48
Configuring Scale .............................................................................................. 9-48
SplitRange...................................................................................................................... 9-49
SplitRange Equations......................................................................................... 9-49
Configuring SplitRange ..................................................................................... 9-49
SteamPtoT...................................................................................................................... 9-51
Sum ................................................................................................................................ 9-52
Sum Equations ................................................................................................... 9-52
Configuring Sum................................................................................................ 9-52
Transform....................................................................................................................... 9-52
Transform Equations.......................................................................................... 9-52
Configuring Transform ...................................................................................... 9-53
Superseded Models ........................................................................................................ 9-53
Valve_dyn .......................................................................................................... 9-53
Valve_dyn Equations ......................................................................................... 9-54
Configuring Valve_dyn ..................................................................................... 9-54

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Contents • v

10 Pressure Relief Models 10-1
Creating Pressure Relief Piping Networks .................................................................... 10-2
Bursting Disk in Dynamic Simulations ......................................................................... 10-2
Reverse Flow for Bursting Disk in Dynamic Simulations ................................ 10-3
Specifying the Bursting Disk Model ................................................................. 10-3
Initializing the Bursting Disk Model ................................................................. 10-3
Displaying Results for the Bursting Disk Model............................................... 10-4
Equations for the Bursting Disk Model ............................................................. 10-4
Expansion in Dynamic Simulations............................................................................... 10-4
Reverse Flow for Expansion in Dynamic Simulations ...................................... 10-5
Specifying the Expansion Model....................................................................... 10-5
Initializing the Expansion Model....................................................................... 10-5
Displaying Results for the Expansion Model .................................................... 10-5
Equations for the Expansion Model................................................................... 10-6
Orifice in Dynamic Simulations .................................................................................. 10-12
Reverse Flow for Orifice in Dynamic Simulations ......................................... 10-12
Specifying the Orifice Model .......................................................................... 10-12
Initializing the Orifice Model .......................................................................... 10-12
Displaying Results for the Orifice Model........................................................ 10-13
Equations for the Orifice Model ...................................................................... 10-13
Pressure Safety Valve in Dynamic Simulations .......................................................... 10-13
Reverse Flow for Pressure Safety Valve in Dynamic Simulations ................. 10-14
Specifying the Pressure Safety Valve Model .................................................. 10-15
Initializing the Pressure Safety Valve Model .................................................. 10-22
Displaying Results for the Pressure Safety Valve Model................................ 10-23
Equations for the Pressure Safety Valve Model .............................................. 10-23
Opening Characteristics Equations.................................................................. 10-35
Viscosity Correction Equations ....................................................................... 10-35
Throttle Valve in Dynamic Simulations ...................................................................... 10-36
Reverse Flow for Throttle Valve in Dynamic Simulations ............................. 10-36
Specifying the Throttle Valve Model .............................................................. 10-36
Initializing the Throttle Valve Model .............................................................. 10-37
Displaying Results for the Throttle Valve Model............................................ 10-37
Equations for the Throttle Valve Model .......................................................... 10-37
DeltaP in Dynamic Simulations................................................................................... 10-38
Reverse Flow for DeltaP in Dynamic Simulations .......................................... 10-38
Specifying the DeltaP Model........................................................................... 10-38
Initializing the DeltaP Model........................................................................... 10-38
Displaying Results for the DeltaP Model ........................................................ 10-39
Equations for the DeltaP Model....................................................................... 10-39
References.................................................................................................................... 10-40

vi • Contents Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

11 Global Parameters 11-1
List of Global Parameters .............................................................................................. 11-2

12 Procedures 12-1
Procedure pChairX ........................................................................................................ 12-1
Mathematical Description.................................................................................. 12-1
Chair Function ................................................................................................... 12-2
Exces Function................................................................................................... 12-2
Usage ............................................................................................................................. 12-2
Liquid Case ........................................................................................................ 12-2
Vapor Case......................................................................................................... 12-3
What is the Availability (Av)?........................................................................... 12-3

Index

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Contents • vii

viii • Contents Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide
Introduction

This chapter describes:

• The contents of this guide
• Associated guides
• Where to find further information

About This Guide

This guide describes the models, physical property procedures and
global parameters that are available in Aspen Dynamics™.

Associated Guides
Aspen Dynamics also comes with these other guides:

Guide Title Description

Getting Started Guide Contains three tutorials for you to work
through, to familiarize yourself with Aspen
Dynamics
Using Aspen Dynamics Contains introductory information on Aspen
Dynamics, as well as instructions for creating,
editing and running simulations.
Examples Guide Contains a series of worked simulations that
run in Aspen Dynamics.

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Introduction • ix

 What You Need To Use This Guide
To use this guide, you need Aspen Dynamics installed on your PC
or a PC file server running Windows 2000 or Windows XP. For
information on how to do this, read the AES Installation Guide
supplied with the product, or contact your system administrator.

For More Information

You can obtain information on AES products by:
• Accessing the comprehensive online Help system
• Reading the printed guides supplied with your product
• Printing the Portable Document Format (PDF) files supplied on
the installation CD
• Accessing Aspen Technology's web page
If you need more detailed assistance than that provided in the
online Help and the PDF files, you can contact Technical Support.
This section explains how to use the online help, print PDF files,
find Aspen Technology on the web, and contact Technical
Support.
Online Help To access online Help:
• From the Help menu, click Help Topics and then do one of the
following:
To Do this
Display a hierarchy of topics by Click the Contents tab
category
Display an index of all Help topics Click the Index tab and then type
the word you require
Search for words or phrases within Click the Find tab and then type
the Help topics the word or phrase you require

Tip To display Help on buttons, fields, menu commands, and

other screen elements, click the What's This button: or , at the
top of the window, and then click the element.

Printing Online Help

To display information on how to print online Help:
1. Open your Aspen Dynamics product and from the Help menu,
click Help Topics.
2. On the Contents tab, double-click Using Help and then
double-click Print Help Topics.

x • Introduction Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 Printing the Portable To print these guides, you must have Adobe Acrobat Reader
Document Format installed on your machine.
Files (PDFs) Tip If you do not have the Adobe Acrobat Reader, you can
download a free copy from the Adobe web site at
http://www.adobe.com.
Note Adobe and Acrobat are trademarks of Adobe Systems,
Incorporated.
After you have installed the Adobe Acrobat Reader, you can open
the files to view and print the guides. To do this:
• From the Start menu, point to Programs, then AspenTech,
Aspen Engineering Suite, Product Name 12.1, Documentation,
and then click the name of the guide you want to access.
World Wide Web For additional information about AspenTech products and
services, check the AspenTech World Wide Web home page on
the Internet at:
http://www.aspentech.com/
Technical Support AspenTech customers with a valid license and software
maintenance agreement can register to access the Online Technical
Support Center at http://support.aspentech.com.
This web support site allows you to:
• Access current product documentation
• Search for tech tips, solutions and frequently asked questions
(FAQs)
• Search for and download application examples
• Search for and download service packs and product updates
• Submit and track technical issues
• Search for and review known limitations
• Send suggestions
Registered users can also subscribe to our Technical Support e-
Bulletins. These e-Bulletins are used to proactively alert users to
important technical support information such as:
• Technical advisories
• Product updates
• Service Pack announcements
• Product release announcements

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Introduction • xi

 Customer support is also available by phone for customers with a
current support contract for this product. The hours listed are in
local time. For the most current contact information, please see the
Online Technical Support Center at http://support.aspentech.com.

Operating Hours

North America 8:00 – 20:00 Eastern Time

South America 9:00 – 17:00 Local time
Europe 8:30 – 18:00 Central European time
Asia and Pacific Region 9:00 – 17:30 Local time

Phone Numbers

North America 1-888-996-7100 Toll-free from U.S., Canada, Mexico

1-281-584-4357 North America Support Center
52-55-5536-2809 Mexico Support Center
South America (54) (11) 4361-7220 Argentina Support Center
(55) (11) 5012-0321 Brazil Support Center
(0800) 333-0125 Toll-free to U.S. from Argentina
(000) (814) 550-4084 Toll-free to U.S. from Brazil
0800 100-2410 Toll-free to U.S. from Venezuela
Europe (32) (2) 701-95-55 European Support Center
Country specific toll-free numbers Austria 0800-111-900
Belgium (0800) 40-687
Denmark 8088-3652
Finland (0) (800) 1-19127
France (0805) 11-0054
Germany 0800-101-0068
Ireland (1) (800) 930-024
Italy 800-905-826
Netherlands (0800) 023-2511
Norway (800) 13817
South Africa 0800-996-852
Spain (900) 951846
Sweden (0200) 895-284
Switzerland (0800) 111-470
UK (0800) 376-7903
Asia and Pacific Region (65) 6395-39-00 Singapore
(81) (3) 3262-1743 Tokyo

xii • Introduction Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 Fax Numbers

North America 1-617-949-1724 (Engineering Suite products)

1-281-584-1807 (Houston, Manufacturing Suite products)
1-281-584-5442 (Aspen PIMS and Aspen Retail products)
1-281-584-4329 (Advanced Control products)
1-301-424-4647 (Aspen ICARUS products)
1-908-516-9550 (Aspen MIMI products)
1-425-492-2388 (Seattle, Manufacturing Suite products)
South America (54) (11) 4361-7220 (Argentina)
(55) (11) 5012-4442 (Brazil)
Europe (32) (2) 701-94-45
Asia and Pacific Region (65) 6395-39-50 (Singapore)
(81) (3) 3262-1744 (Tokyo)

E-mail

North America support@aspentech.com (Engineering Suite products)

atmdsupport@aspentech.com (Aspen ICARUS products)
mimi.support@aspentech.com (Aspen MIMI products)
pims.support@aspentech.com (Aspen PIMS products)
aspenretail.support@aspentech.com (Aspen Retail products)
ACS.Support@aspentech.com (Advanced Control products)
AMS.Support@aspentech.com (Manufacturing Suite products)
Mexico.Support@aspentech.com (Mexico)
South America Argentina.Support@aspentech.com (Argentina)
tecnosp@aspentech.com (Brazil)
Europe atesupport@aspentech.com (Engineering Suite products)
cimview@aspentech.com (CIMVIEW products)
Metals.Support@aspentech.com (Metals products)
AMS.Support@aspentech.com (All other products
Asia and Pacific Region
Singapore:
atasupport@aspentech.com (Engineering Suite
products)
mimi.support@aspentech.com (Aspen MIMI products)
aspenretail.support@aspentech.com (Aspen Retail
products)
AMS.Support@aspentech.com (All other products)
Tokyo:
atjsupport@aspentech.com (Engineering Suite
products)
TK_Support@aspentech.com (All other products

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Introduction • xiii

xiv • Introduction Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide
1 Streams

This chapter describes the three types of stream models that

represent each Aspen Plus™ stream in a dynamic simulation. The
model used depends upon the type of stream:
Type of Stream Model Name
Material MaterialStream
Heat HeatStream
Work WorkStream

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Streams • 1-1

 MaterialStream in Dynamic
Simulations
MaterialStream is used to represent material stream feeds and
material streams that connect blocks. During a dynamic
simulation, you can manipulate variables in MaterialStream feeds
to change the feed conditions of your simulation, for example, to:
• Introduce feed disturbances to test operability and control
• Simulate feedstock changes or grade transitions
• Control a feed flow rate
MaterialStream:
• Changes with time, but is not strictly dynamic because these
changes are instantaneous.
• Supports reverse flow
Reverse Flow for When configuring your simulation for reverse flow, use the
Material Stream in MaterialStream Configure form to set up the reverse flow
Dynamic Simulations conditions in product streams. These are the downstream
conditions that become active if the flow in the stream reverses.
The specifications for the reverse flow conditions are similar to the
forward flow conditions you gave in Aspen Plus. No additional
specifications are required for feed streams or intermediate
streams.
When reverse flow is enabled, flow reversal in MaterialStream is
indicated by a negative flow rate.
Notes:
• In some circumstances, such as creating a pressure relief
simulation, you may need to use the Setup button on the
Configure form to initialize a MaterialStream. The Setup
procedures are based on the assumption of forward flow, so
you should avoid using negative pressure gradients, which
would give reverse flow in MaterialStream, for the initial
starting point.
• For compatibility with earlier versions of Aspen Dynamics, the
temperature displayed on the Results forms for feed streams
always shows the forward flow temperature, regardless of the
actual flow direction. The true stream temperature during
reverse flow is given by the inlet port variable In_F.Trev,
which can be found on the AllVariables form.
For more information, see Creating a Reverse Flow Simulation in
the Aspen Dynamics User Guide.

1-2 • Streams Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 The specifications for a dynamic simulation are the same as those
Specifying
you gave in Aspen Plus for the steady-state simulation. You can
MaterialStream Feeds
manipulate these values during a dynamic simulation. For
for Dynamic
example, if you specified pressure, vapor fraction, total mass flow
Simulations
rate and mole fractions in the steady-state simulation, then these
would be the variables you could manipulate during the dynamic
simulation.
Where component fractions are specified, MaterialStream
normalizes these to ensure the values used in the simulation sum to
one. Similarly, if both total flow rate and component flow rates are
specified, the component flow rates are scaled so that they always
sum to the specified total flow rate. If component flow rates are
specified but not the total flow rate, then you cannot manipulate
the total flow rate during the dynamic simulation. The total flow
rate is calculated as the sum of the component flow rates.
Using the Stream By default, these results are available for all streams:
Sensor • Mass, molar and volumetric flow rates
• Temperature
• Pressure
• Molar enthalpy
• Molar weight
• Mass and molar density
• Component mass and mole fractions
• Component mass and mole flows
The stream sensor enables you to calculate additional properties
for a stream, including:
• Properties of each phase within the stream
• Additional properties, such as pH
• Cumulative total flows (mass, molar and volumetric)
• Cumulative component flows (mass and molar)
You can view these results on the Results form for the stream. You
can also select the additional properties as measured variables in
your control scheme.
To maximize the speed of your simulation, by default all stream
sensors are switched off. To switch on a stream sensor:
1. Click the right mouse button on a stream in the flowsheet.
2. From the menu that appears, point to Forms, then click
ConfigureSensor.
3. In the ConfigureSensor dialog box, ensure the Sensor On box
is selected.

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Streams • 1-3

 Calculating Properties for Each Phase
To calculate properties for each phase in the stream:
1. In the ConfigureSensor dialog box, ensure the Calculate
Phase Properties box is selected.
2. Change Valid Phases to the phases that could be present in
the stream.
Selecting Vapor-Liquid or Vapor-Liquid-Liquid will cause
the sensor to flash the stream at every time step during your
simulation.
Tip To maximize the speed of the simulation, select Vapor-
Only or Liquid-Only unless you expect multi-phase flow in the
stream.

1-4 • Streams Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 3. These additional properties will be calculated:
When Additional properties calculated
Always Mass and molar density
Always Volumetric flow rate
If there is more than one For each phase: molar fraction,
phase molar enthalpy, mass and molar
density, molar weight, component
mole fractions

Calculating Additional Properties

To calculate additional properties:

1. In the Available Properties list, select the property or
properties you require and click .
2. In the Calculate Properties for Phase box, select the phase for
which the properties are to be calculated.
If you select Total, the overall phase composition will be used
to calculate the property, otherwise the composition of the
selected phase will be used.
3. The property ASTM D1160 temperature, requires that you
specify the pressure for which the property is to be calculated.
Enter this in the Property Pressure box.
4. The properties ASTM D1160 temperature and ASTM D86
temperature, require that you specify the liquid volume %
distilled for which the property is to be calculated. Enter this
in the Liquid Volume % Distilled box.

HeatStream in Dynamic Simulations

HeatStream is used to represent heat stream feeds and heat streams
that connect blocks.
During a dynamic simulation, you can manipulate the duty of a
HeatStream feed to introduce disturbances to test operability and
control.
HeatStream:
• Does not support reverse flow
• Has no dynamic features.
• Allows you to manipulate the duty (Q) if it is fixed

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Streams • 1-5

 Specifying The duty specification for a dynamic simulation is the same as that
HeatStream Feeds for for the steady-state simulation. You can manipulate the duty
Dynamic Simulations during a dynamic simulation.

WorkStream in Dynamic Simulations

WorkStream is used to represent work stream feeds and work
streams that connect blocks.
During a dynamic simulation, you can manipulate the power of a
WorkStream feed to introduce disturbances to test operability and
control.
WorkStream:
• Does not support reverse flow
• Has no dynamic features.
• Allows you to manipulate the power (W) if it is fixed.
Specifying The power specification for a dynamic simulation is the same as
WorkStream Feeds that for a steady-state simulation. You can manipulate the power
for Dynamic during a dynamic simulation.
Simulations

1-6 • Streams Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

2 Mixers and Splitters

This chapter describes the unit operation models for mixers and
splitters:
• Mixer
• FSplit

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Mixers and Splitters • 2-1

 Mixer in Dynamic Simulations
Use Mixer to represent:
• An instantaneous mixer, such as a mixing tee
• A dynamic mixer, such as a mixing tank
If only a single material inlet is connected, Mixer can represent
either a buffer tank or a surge tank.
Only the material stream mixer can have dynamic characteristics;
the heat and work stream mixers are instantaneous.
Mixer supports reverse flow.

Pressure/Flow Effects for Mixer

For instantaneous mixer models, the pressure drop is fixed at the
steady-state value. The outlet flow rate is determined by the
material balance.
For dynamic mixer models where the vapor holdup is modeled:
• Pressure at any point in time is determined by the conditions in
the vessel, that is, temperature and holdup.
• The outlet vapor flow rate is initially at the steady-state value,
but is manipulated to control the pressure.
• The outlet liquid flow rate is initially at the steady-state value,
but is manipulated to control the liquid level during dynamic
simulations.
For dynamic mixer models where only the liquid holdup is
modeled:
• Pressure in the vessel is fixed at the steady-state value.
• The outlet flow rate is initially at the steady-state value but is
manipulated to control the liquid level during dynamic
simulations.

2-2 • Mixers and Splitters Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 Liquid Head for Mixer
The pressure effect of liquid head is only considered for a dynamic
mixer model with a single liquid phase.
To model this effect, the parameter LiquidHead needs to be set to
Yes:
Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value
LiquidHead Liquid outlet pressure includes No No
hydrostatic head Yes
The pressure effect takes into consideration the liquid level and the
liquid outlet stream elevation change. You need to specify the
liquid outlet stream elevation change:
Variable Description Default Value
Veshead Liquid outlet stream elevation change 0

Modeling Pressure Relief Systems with Mixer

To use Mixer for modeling pressure relief in a drum:
1. Ensure that the simulation is set up to run in pressure-driven
mode. To check this, open the SimulationOptions table and
check that the value of GlobalPDriven is True.
2. In the All Items pane of the Simulation Explorer, under the
Dynamics folder, select Stream Types, and in the Contents
pane, select MaterialStream.
3. Connect MaterialStream to the Mixer Relief port.
4. Attach to the stream any other pressure relief models as
appropriate, for example, Pressure Safety Valve.
5. Specify the settings and initialize the pressure relief model
selected.
For more information on pressure relief systems in Aspen
Dynamics, see Chapter 10.

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Mixers and Splitters • 2-3

 Pressure and Level Control for Mixer
Pressure and level controllers are automatically added to the
flowsheet when appropriate.
For flow-driven simulations:
Controller When Measured Manipulated
added variable variable
Pressure Vapor holdup is modeled Pressure in vessel Vapor outlet stream
molar flow rate
Level Liquid holdup is modeled Overall liquid level Liquid outlet stream
mass flow rate

For pressure-driven simulations:

Checks are made during the export from Aspen Plus to see if there
is a valve on the outlet stream of the Mixer block. If a valve is
present in the current hierarchy, then the controller will manipulate
the valve position.
Controller When Measured Manipulated
added variable variable
Pressure Vessel type is vertical or Pressure in vessel Valve position for the
horizontal, and ValidPhases is valve on the outlet
Vapor-Only stream
Level Vessel type is vertical or Overall liquid level Valve position for the
horizontal, and ValidPhases is valve on the outlet
Liquid-Only stream
If no valve is present in the current hierarchy, then the controller
output is not connected and you should connect the controller
output (OP) to an appropriate manipulated variable elsewhere in
the flowsheet.
Reverse Flow for Mixer is supported in reverse flow simulations. No additional
Mixer in Dynamic specifications are required to configure Mixer for reverse flow.
Simulations When reverse flow is enabled, Mixer calculates the conditions of
each out-flowing stream from the conditions of the in-flowing
streams. The flow direction of each stream is determined during
simulation from the pressure gradients around the flowsheet.
Therefore a Mixer can act as a flow mixer and/or a flow splitter,
depending on the flow directions of the streams connected to it.
For more information, see Creating a Reverse Flow Simulation in
Chapter 3 of the Aspen Dynamics User Guide.

2-4 • Mixers and Splitters Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 Specifying Mixer for Use the Mixer Dynamic form to add the specifications for dynamic
Dynamic Simulations simulations.
Choose one of these mixer types:
• An instantaneous mixer with zero holdup (default)
• A vertical vessel
• A horizontal vessel
You must specify the geometry of vertical and horizontal vessels.
If one or more liquid phases are present, also specify the initial
liquid volume fraction. For a Vapor-Liquid or Vapor-Liquid-
Liquid mixer that is exported in a pressure driven simulation, the
proportions of vapor and liquid phases leaving in the product
stream are equal to those in the vessel. This gives more robust
behavior during a dynamic simulation when a phase disappears. If
you wish to control or manipulate the flows of the different phases,
it is recommended that you use a Flash2 or Flash3 block.
To ensure that the initial composition of the product stream
matches the steady state composition, the Mixer model ignores the
initial liquid volume fraction specification, and instead, uses the
outlet equilibrium molar vapor fraction to calculate the initial
phase holdups in the mixer.
For vertical and horizontal vessels you can choose to model
equipment heat capacity and heat transfer with the environment.
Instantaneous mixers require no specifications in addition to those
given for steady-state simulation.

Specifying Vessel Geometry for Mixer in Dynamic Simulations

For vertical and horizontal vessels, specify the head type and
vessel size.
Choose one of these head types:
• 2:1 elliptical (default)
• Hemispherical
• Flat plate
Specify the vessel size:
If the heads are Specify this and internal diameter
Elliptical Tangent to tangent length
Hemispherical Tangent to tangent length
Flat plate Internal length

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Mixers and Splitters • 2-5

 For more information about vessel geometry, see the Using Aspen
Dynamics guide, Chapter 1.

Specifying the Initial Liquid Volume Fraction for Mixer

If one or more liquid phases are present, specify the initial liquid
volume fraction. The initial liquid volume fraction is the volume of
liquid in the vessel at the start of the simulation, divided by the
total volume of the vessel. The default value is 0.5.
If the steady-state simulation calculates a Then the vessel
vapor fraction of will initially be
Zero Full of liquid
One Full of vapor

Specifying Equipment Heat Transfer for Mixer in Dynamic

Simulations
For vertical and horizontal vessels, you can choose to model
equipment heat capacity and heat transfer with the environment:
To model equipment heat capacity:

You must enter: On the:

Mass of the vessel Equipment Heat Transfer sheet
Specific heat capacity Equipment Heat Transfer sheet
To model heat transfer with the environment:

You must enter: On the:

Overall heat transfer coefficient from Equipment Heat Transfer sheet
the vessel wall to the environment
Ambient temperature Setup Specifications Global sheet
Overall heat transfer coefficient from Vessel Wall Heat Transfer sheet
the process fluid to the vessel wall
When modeling heat transfer with the environment, you can also
model the variation of heat transfer coefficient with wetted wall
area, but not for vapor-only mixers.
To do this:

You must enter: On the:

Overall heat transfer coefficient Vessel Wall Heat Transfer sheet
from the liquid phase process fluid,
to the vessel wall
Overall heat transfer coefficient Vessel Wall Heat Transfer sheet

2-6 • Mixers and Splitters Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 from the vapor phase process fluid,
to the vessel wall

FSplit in Dynamic Simulations

FSplit combines material streams (or heat streams or work
streams) and divides the resulting stream into two or more streams.
All outlets have the same composition and properties as the mixed
inlet.
FSplit is used to model a flow splitter such as a bleed valve. It
supports reverse flow.
The FSplit model has no dynamic features.
If any of the outlet streams connected to an FSplit block are
disconnected or new outlet streams are connected you must update
spltstream which is the set of outlet stream names for which split
fractions are defined. This is found on the Configure form. For a
heat stream or work stream FSplit the variable is sphtstream or
spwkstream respectively.

Pressure/Flow Effects for FSplit

The pressure drop is fixed at the steady-state value. The outlet flow
rates are determined by material balance.
Reverse Flow for FSplit is supported in reverse flow simulations. No additional
FSplit in Dynamic specifications are required to configure FSplit for reverse flow.
Simulations When reverse flow is enabled, FSplit calculates the conditions of
each out-flowing stream from the conditions of the in-flowing
streams. The flow direction of each stream is determined during
simulation from the pressure gradients around the flowsheet.
Therefore an FSplit can act as a flow splitter and/or a flow mixer,
depending on the flow directions of the streams connected to it.
For more information, see Chapter 3 in the Aspen Dynamics User
Guide.

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Mixers and Splitters • 2-7

2-8 • Mixers and Splitters Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide
3 Separators

This chapter describes the unit operation models for flashes,

decanters and separators:
• Flash2
• Flash3
• Decanter
• Sep
• Sep2

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Separators • 3-1

 Flash2 in Dynamic Simulations
Flash2 is a two outlet flash which you can use to represent:
• An instantaneous flash with no dynamic effects
• A vertical or horizontal flash drum
Liquid and vapor holdups in the flash drum are modeled, and the
liquid level can vary during a dynamic simulation. If you select a
vertical or horizontal flash drum, you have a choice of methods for
heating or cooling.
All phases are assumed to be in equilibrium at all times.
Flash2 supports reverse flow, but only in Dynamic mode.

Pressure/Flow Effects for Flash2

For an instantaneous flash:
• The total outlet flow rate is always equal to the inlet flow rate.
• The pressure drop is fixed at the steady-state value.
For a vertical or horizontal flash drum:
• The pressure in the vessel at any point in time is determined by
the conditions in the vessel, that is holdup and temperature.
• The outlet vapor flow rate is initially at the steady-state value,
but is manipulated to control the pressure during dynamic
simulations.
• The outlet liquid flow rate is initially at the steady-state value,
but is manipulated to control the liquid level during dynamic
simulations.

Liquid Head for Flash2

To model the pressure effect of liquid head on the liquid outlet
stream, the parameter LiquidHead needs to be set to Yes:
Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value
LiquidHead Liquid outlet pressure No No
includes hydrostatic head Yes
The pressure effect takes into consideration the liquid level and the
liquid outlet stream elevation change. The liquid outlet stream
elevation change needs to be specified:
Variable Description Default Value
Veshead Liquid outlet stream elevation change 0

Modeling Pressure Relief Systems with Flash2

To use Flash2 for modeling pressure relief in a drum:

3-2 • Separators Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 1. Ensure that the simulation is set up to run in pressure-driven
mode. To check this, open the SimulationOptions table and
check that the value of GlobalPDriven is True.
2. In the All Items pane of the Simulation Explorer, under the
Dynamics folder, select Stream Types, and in the Contents
pane, select MaterialStream.
3. Connect the material stream to the Flash2 Relief port.
4. Attach to the stream any other pressure relief models as
appropriate, for example, Pressure Safety Valve.
5. Specify the settings and initialize the pressure relief model
selected.
For more information on the pressure relief models in Aspen
Dynamics, see Chapter 10.

Pressure and Level Control for Flash2

Pressure and level controllers are automatically added to the
flowsheet when appropriate.
For flow-driven simulations:
Controller When vessel type Measured Manipulated
added is variable variable
Pressure Vertical or horizontal Pressure in vessel Vapor outlet stream
molar flow rate
Level Vertical or horizontal Overall liquid level Liquid outlet stream
mass flow rate
For pressure-driven simulations:
Checks are made during the export from Aspen Plus, to see if there
is a valve on each outlet stream of the Flash2 block. If a valve is
present in the current hierarchy, then the controller will manipulate
the valve position.
Controller When vessel type Measured Manipulated
added is variable variable
Pressure Vertical or horizontal Pressure in vessel Valve position for the
valve on the vapor outlet
stream
Level Vertical or horizontal Overall liquid level Valve position for the
valve on the liquid outlet
stream
If no valve is present in the current hierarchy, then the controller
output (OP) is not connected and you should connect the controller
output (OP) to an appropriate manipulated variable elsewhere in
the flowsheet.

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Separators • 3-3

 The automatically added pressure and level controllers are
normally sufficient to ensure that the dynamic simulation runs at
steady state until a disturbance is introduced.
For some processes, you may need to add temperature controllers
to ensure that the dynamic simulation runs at steady state,
particularly if you are using the Constant Duty option to model
heat transfer in a block.
Reverse Flow for Flash2 is supported in reverse flow simulations when the Vessel
Flash2 in Dynamic type is Vertical or Horizontal. Flash2 is not supported when the
Simulations Vessel type is Instantaneous.
When configuring your simulation for reverse flow, use the
RFlowPhase parameter on the Flash2 Configure form to specify
which phase in the Flash2 will flow out through the feed stream(s)
if the pressure gradients cause the flows in those streams to
reverse. You can select the vapor phase (Vapor), the liquid phase
(Liquid) or a homogeneous mixture of the two (Mixed) with the
same phase fractions as in the Flash2. The default value is Mixed.
When reverse flow is enabled, material flow may enter or exit
Flash2 via any of its connected streams, depending on the pressure
gradients around the flowsheet.
Note If you specify a pressure drop for Flash2 in Aspen Plus, the
inlet stream pressure will not equal the block pressure and, for the
dynamic simulation, the inlet pressure change will be fixed to the
steady state value. Upon export to Aspen Dynamics, the Pressure
Checker will warn you that this fixed pressure drop will not vary
with flow rate. If you ignore this warning when using Flash2 in
reverse flow simulations, when the flow reverses you may get
misleading results and/or convergence problems. You can avoid
this by setting the inlet pressure drop in Flash2 to zero and
modeling an inlet pressure drop which does vary with flow rate
using a Valve.
For more information, see Creating a Reverse Flow Simulation in
Chapter 3 of the Aspen Dynamics User Guide.
Specifying Flash2 for Duty is always specified for dynamic simulations:
Dynamic Simulations If Then the dynamic duty
specification is the:
Duty is a steady-state Calculated steady-state duty. The calculated
specification duty equals the specified duty except where
the duty is manipulated by, for example, a
design specification or a Fortran block.
Duty is not a steady-state Calculated steady-state duty
specification

3-4 • Separators Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 Inlet heat streams are used as Sum of the inlet heat stream duties
the steady-state duty
specification

Use the Flash2 Dynamic form to add the specifications for

dynamic simulations.
Flash2 can represent:
• An instantaneous flash (default)
• A horizontal vessel
• A vertical vessel
For an instantaneous flash you can choose a method of calculating
heat transfer within the vessel.
For vertical or horizontal vessels, you must specify the vessel
geometry. If liquid is present at steady state, also specify the initial
liquid volume fraction. You can also choose a method of
calculating the heat transfer within the vessel.
For vertical and horizontal vessels, you can choose to model
equipment heat capacity and heat transfer with the environment.

Specifying Vessel Geometry for Flash2 in Dynamic

Simulations
Choose one of these head types:
• 2:1 elliptical (default)
• Hemispherical
• Flat plate
Specify the vessel size:
If the heads are Specify this and internal diameter
Elliptical Tangent to tangent length
Hemispherical Tangent to tangent length
Flat plate Internal length

For more information about vessel geometry, see the Aspen

Dynamics User Guide, Chapter 1.

Specifying the Initial Liquid Volume Fraction for Flash2 in

Dynamic Simulations
If liquid is present at steady state, specify the initial liquid volume
fraction. The initial liquid volume fraction is the volume of liquid
in the vessel at the start of the simulation, as a fraction of the total
volume of the vessel. The default value is 0.5.

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Separators • 3-5

 If the steady-state simulation predicts only vapor or only liquid
leaving the Flash2, the initial liquid volume fraction is ignored,
and the following approach is used:
If the steady-state simulation Then the initial liquid
calculates a vapor fraction of volume fraction will be
Zero One
One Zero

Specifying Heat Transfer for Flash2 in Dynamic Simulations

Three methods of calculating heating or cooling within the flash
vessel are available. Choose one of these heat transfer calculation
methods:
If you choose Specify Description
Constant duty No additional input Duty is specified. Initially duty is
(default) equal to the steady-state value but
you can manipulate it during the
simulation either manually or by
using a controller. A useful
approximation for many situations.
Constant Medium temperature Corresponds to the case where you
temperature have a condensing or boiling fluid
exchanging its latent heat.
LMTD • Inlet temperature of the medium Corresponds to the case where you
• Heat capacity of the medium have a fluid whose temperature
changes as it exchanges sensible
• Initial closest temperature approach heat. Initial medium flow rate is
between medium and process fluid automatically calculated, but you
can manipulate it during the
simulation either manually or by
using a controller.
Dynamic Inlet temperature of the medium. Corresponds to the case when you
Heat capacity of the medium have a well-mixed heating/cooling
Initial closest temperature approach jacket.
between medium and process fluid
Mass holdup of the medium

For more details of these methods, see the Aspen Dynamics User
Guide, Chapter 1.

Specifying Equipment Heat Transfer for Flash2 in Dynamic

Simulations
For vertical and horizontal vessels, you can choose to model
equipment heat capacity and heat transfer with the environment:
To model equipment heat capacity:

3-6 • Separators Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 You must enter: On the:
Mass of the vessel Equipment Heat Transfer sheet
Specific heat capacity Equipment Heat Transfer sheet
To model heat transfer with the environment:
You must enter: On the:
Overall heat transfer coefficient from Equipment Heat Transfer sheet
the vessel wall to the environment
Ambient temperature Setup Specifications Global sheet
Overall heat transfer coefficient from Vessel Wall Heat Transfer sheet
the process fluid to the vessel wall

To model the variation of heat transfer coefficient with wetted

wall area, when modeling heat transfer with the environment:
You must enter: On the:
Overall heat transfer coefficient Vessel Wall Heat Transfer sheet
from the liquid phase process fluid,
to the vessel wall
Overall heat transfer coefficient Vessel Wall Heat Transfer sheet
from the vapor phase process fluid,
to the vessel wall

Entrainment in Flash2
In Aspen Dynamics, liquid entrainment in Flash2 is specified
differently than in Aspen Plus, when the dynamics of the flash
vessel are included. This is because the Aspen Plus entrainment
specification assumes steady state, which is not applicable to a
dynamic flash because the liquid flow and vapor flow out of the
vessel are independent of each other, so the level and pressure in
the vessel can vary.
In Aspen Plus, the liquid entrained in the vapor is specified as the
liquid molar flow in the vapor stream over the total of liquid molar
flow, where the total liquid molar flow is given by:
[molar flow through the liquid outlet] plus
[molar flow of liquid that leaves via the vapor outlet]
For an instantaneous flash, Aspen Dynamics uses the same
specification. The variable ENTR is fixed and matches the Aspen
Plus specification.

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Separators • 3-7

 For a dynamic flash, another variable, LF_V, is fixed. LF_V is the
fraction of the vapor outlet stream that is entrained liquid, namely:
[molar flow of entrained liquid in the vapor outlet
stream] over [total molar flow of the vapor outlet
stream]
LF_V could be manipulated or calculated with a flowsheet
equation that implements, for example, a correlation giving the
entrainment as a function of conditions in the block. You can see
such flowsheet equations in the Flash2 model.
The initialization run should give exactly the same results as
Aspen Plus. Strictly speaking, any such comparison of results is
suspect because Aspen Plus gives only a steady state solution, but
it may be important to understand the difference in the
specification.
Note The relief vent port is always vapor.

Flash3 in Dynamic Simulations

Use Flash3 to represent flashes, evaporators, knock-out drums, and
other single stage separators where two liquid phases can exist.
Both instantaneous and dynamic models are available. Flash3 does
the following:
• Supports reverse flow, but only in Dynamic mode
• Represents either horizontal or vertical drums
• Models dynamic material and energy balances, including liquid
1, liquid 2, and vapor holdups
• Includes a choice of methods for specifying heating or cooling
All phases are assumed to be in equilibrium at all times.

Pressure/Flow Effects for Flash3

Pressure/flow effects for Flash3 are:
• The pressure in the vessel at any point in time is determined by
the conditions in the vessel, that is, vapor holdup and
temperature.
• The outlet vapor flow rate is manipulated to control the
pressure.
• The liquid 1 outlet flow rate is manipulated to control the
overall liquid level and the liquid 2 outlet flow rate is
manipulated to control the liquid interface level.

3-8 • Separators Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 Liquid Head for Flash3
To model the pressure effect of liquid head on the liquid outlet
stream, the parameter LiquidHead needs to be set to Yes:
Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value
LiquidHead Liquid outlet pressure No No
includes hydrostatic head Yes
The pressure effect takes into consideration the liquid level and the
liquid outlet stream elevation change. The liquid outlet stream
elevation change needs to be specified:
Variable Description Default Value
Veshead Liquid outlet stream elevation change 0

Modeling Pressure Relief Systems with Flash3

To use Flash3 for modeling pressure relief in a drum:
1. Ensure that the simulation is set up to run in pressure-driven
mode. To check this, open the SimulationOptions table and
check that the value of GlobalPDriven is True.
2. In the All Items pane of the Simulation Explorer, under the
Dynamics folder, select Stream Types, and in the Contents
pane, select MaterialStream.
3. Connect the material stream to the Flash3 Relief port.
4. Attach to the stream any other pressure relief models as
appropriate, for example, Pressure Safety Valve.
5. Specify the settings and initialize the pressure relief model
selected.
For more information on the pressure relief models in Aspen
Dynamics, see Chapter 10.

Pressure and Level Control for Flash3

Pressure and level controllers are automatically added to the
flowsheet when appropriate.
For flow-driven simulations:
Controller When vessel type is Measured variable Manipulated variable
added
Pressure Vertical or horizontal Pressure in vessel Vapor outlet stream molar
flow rate
Level Vertical or horizontal Overall liquid level Liquid 1 outlet stream mass
flow rate
Level Vertical or horizontal Liquid interface level Liquid 2 outlet stream mass
flow rate

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Separators • 3-9

 For pressure-driven simulations:
Checks are made during the export from Aspen Plus to see if there
is a valve on each outlet stream of the Flash3 block. If a valve is
present in the current hierarchy, then the controller will manipulate
the valve position.
Controller When vessel type is Measured variable Manipulated variable
added
Pressure Vertical or horizontal Pressure in vessel Valve position for the valve
on the vapor outlet stream
Level Vertical or horizontal Overall liquid level Valve position for the valve
on the liquid 1 outlet stream
Level Vertical or horizontal Liquid interface level Valve position for the valve
on the liquid 2 outlet stream
If no valve is present in the current hierarchy, then the controller
output is not connected and you should connect the controller
output (OP) to an appropriate manipulated variable elsewhere in
the flowsheet.
The automatically added pressure and level controllers are
normally sufficient to ensure that the dynamic simulation runs at
steady state until a disturbance is introduced. For some processes,
you may need to add temperature controllers to ensure that the
dynamic simulation runs at steady state, particularly if you are
using the Constant Duty option to model heat transfer in a block.

Reverse Flow for Flash3 is supported in reverse flow simulations when the Vessel
Flash3 in Dynamic type is Vertical or Horizontal. Flash3 is not supported when the
Simulations Vessel type is Instantaneous.
When configuring your simulation for reverse flow, use the
RFlowPhase parameter on the Flash3 Configure form to specify
which phase in the Flash3 will flow out through the feed stream(s)
if the pressure gradients cause the flows in those streams to
reverse. You can select the vapor phase (Vapor), the 1st liquid
phase (Liquid1), the 2nd liquid phase (Liquid2), a homogeneous
liquid phase mixture (Liquid) or a homogeneous three phase
mixture (Mixed) with the same phase fractions as in the Flash3.
The default value is Mixed.
When reverse flow is enabled, material flow may enter or exit
Flash3 via any of its connected streams, depending on the pressure
gradients around the flowsheet.
Note If you specify a pressure drop for Flash3 in Aspen Plus, the
inlet stream pressure will not equal the block pressure and, for the
dynamic simulation, the inlet pressure change will be fixed to the
steady state value. Upon export to Aspen Dynamics, the Pressure

3-10 • Separators Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 Checker will warn you that this fixed pressure drop will not vary
with flow rate. If you ignore this warning when using Flash3 in
reverse flow simulations, when the flow reverses you may get
misleading results and/or convergence problems. You can avoid
this by setting the inlet pressure drop in Flash3 to zero and
modeling an inlet pressure drop which does vary with flow rate
using a Valve.
For more information, see Creating a Reverse Flow Simulation in
Chapter 3 of the Aspen Dynamics User Guide.
Specifying Flash3 for Duty is always specified for dynamic simulations:
Dynamic Simulations If Then the dynamic duty
specification is the
Duty is a steady-state Calculated steady-state duty
specification The calculated duty equals the specified
duty except where the duty is
manipulated by, for example, a design
specification or a Fortran block.
Duty is not a steady-state Calculated steady-state duty
specification
Inlet heat streams are used as Sum of the inlet heat stream duties
the steady-state duty
specification

Use the Flash3 Dynamic form to add the specifications for

dynamic simulations.
Flash3 can represent:
• An instantaneous flash (default)
• A vertical vessel
• A horizontal vessel
For an instantaneous flash you can choose a method of calculating
heat transfer within the vessel.
For vertical and horizontal vessels, you must specify the vessel
geometry. If one or more liquid phases are present, also specify the
initial liquid volume fraction. If two liquid phases are present, you
can specify the liquid 1 volume fraction. You can also choose a
method of calculating the heat transfer within the vessel.
Also, for vertical and horizontal vessels, you can choose to model
equipment heat capacity and heat transfer with the environment.

Specifying Vessel Geometry for Flash3 in Dynamic

Simulations
Choose one of these head types:

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Separators • 3-11

 • 2:1 elliptical (default)
• Hemispherical
• Flat plate
Specify the vessel size:
If the heads are Specify this and internal diameter
Elliptical Tangent to tangent length
Hemispherical Tangent to tangent length
Flat plate Internal length

For more information about vessel geometry, see the Aspen

Dynamics User Guide, Chapter 1.

Specifying the Initial Conditions for Flash3 in Dynamic

Simulations
If one or more liquid phases are present, specify the initial liquid
volume fraction. This is the volume of liquid in the vessel at the
start of the simulation divided by the total volume of the vessel.
The default value is 0.5.

3-12 • Separators Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 If the steady-state simulation predicts only vapor or only liquid
leaving the Flash3, the initial liquid volume fraction is ignored,
and the following approach is used:
If the steady-state simulation Then the initial liquid
calculates a vapor fraction of volume fraction will be
Zero One
One Zero
If two liquid phases are present, you can specify the initial liquid 1
volume fraction. This is the volume of the liquid 1 phase in the
vessel at the start of the simulation, divided by the total liquid
volume. If you do not specify a value, then the model calculates
the initial liquid 1 volume using the steady state liquid ratio (beta).

Specifying Heat Transfer for Flash3 in Dynamic Simulations

Three methods of calculating heating or cooling within the flash
vessel are available. Choose one of these heat transfer calculation
methods:
If you choose Specify Description
Constant duty (default) No additional input Duty is specified. It is initially equal
to the steady-state value but you can
manipulate it during the simulation
either manually or by using a
controller. A useful approximation
for many situations
Constant temperature Medium temperature Corresponds to the case where you
have a condensing or boiling fluid
exchanging its latent heat.
LMTD • Inlet temperature of the Corresponds to the case where you
medium have a fluid whose temperature
• Heat capacity of the changes as it exchanges sensible
medium heat. Initial medium flow rate is
automatically calculated, but you
• Initial closest temperature can manipulate it during the
approach between simulation either manually or by
medium and process fluid using a controller.
Dynamic Inlet temperature of the Corresponds to the case when you
medium. have a well-mixed heating/cooling
Heat capacity of the jacket
medium
Initial closest temperature
approach between medium
and process fluid
Mass holdup of the medium

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Separators • 3-13

 For more details of these methods, see the Aspen Dynamics User
Guide, Chapter 1.

Specifying Equipment Heat Transfer for Flash3 in Dynamic

Simulations
For vertical and horizontal vessels, you can choose to model
equipment heat capacity and heat transfer with the environment:
To model equipment heat capacity:
You must enter: On the:
Mass of the vessel Equipment Heat Transfer sheet
Specific heat capacity Equipment Heat Transfer sheet
To model heat transfer with the environment:
You must enter: On the:
Overall heat transfer coefficient from Equipment Heat Transfer sheet
the vessel wall to the environment
Ambient temperature Setup Specifications Global sheet
Overall heat transfer coefficient from Vessel Wall Heat Transfer sheet
the process fluid to the vessel wall
To model the variation of heat transfer coefficient with wetted
wall area, when modeling heat transfer with the environment:
You must enter: On the:
Overall heat transfer coefficient Vessel Wall Heat Transfer sheet
from the liquid phase process fluid,
to the vessel wall
Overall heat transfer coefficient Vessel Wall Heat Transfer sheet
from the vapor phase process fluid,
to the vessel wall

Entrainment in Flash3
In Aspen Dynamics, liquid entrainment in Flash3 is specified
differently than in Aspen Plus, when the dynamics of the flash
vessel are included. This is because the Aspen Plus entrainment
specification assumes steady state, which is not applicable to a
dynamic flash because the liquid flow and vapor flow out of the
vessel are independent of each other, so the level and pressure in
the vessel can vary.
In Aspen Plus, the liquid entrained in the vapor is specified as the
liquid molar flow in the vapor stream over the total of liquid molar
flow, where the total liquid molar flow is given by:
[molar flow through the liquid outlet] plus
[molar flow of liquid that leaves via the vapor outlet]

3-14 • Separators Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 For an instantaneous flash, Aspen Dynamics uses the same
specification. The variable ENTR is fixed and matches the Aspen
Plus specification.
For a dynamic flash, another variable, LF_V, is fixed. LF_V is the
fraction of the vapor outlet stream that is entrained liquid, namely:
[molar flow of entrained liquid in the vapor outlet
stream] over [total molar flow of the vapor outlet
stream]
LF_V could be manipulated or calculated with a flowsheet
equation that implements, for example, a correlation giving the
entrainment as a function of conditions in the block. You can see
such flowsheet equations in the Flash3 model.
The initialization run should give exactly the same results as
Aspen Plus. Strictly speaking, any such comparison of results is
suspect because Aspen Plus gives only a steady state solution, but
it may be important to understand the difference in the
specification.
Note The relief vent port is always vapor.

Decanter in Dynamic Simulations

Use Decanter to model knockout drums, decanters, and other
single-stage separators with no vapor present.
The decanter dynamic model can represent either horizontal or
vertical drums. Liquid holdups are modeled and the liquid and
interface levels can vary during a dynamic simulation. Both liquid
phases are assumed to be in equilibrium at all times. Decanter is
supported in reverse flow simulations.
The dynamic model does not support calculation of the liquid-
liquid distribution coefficient using:
• User KLL subroutine
• The steady-state built-in polynomial correlation

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Separators • 3-15

 Pressure/Flow Effects for Decanter
The pressure in the vessel is fixed at the steady-state value. The
liquid outlet flow rates are initially at the steady-state value but can
be manipulated to control their respective levels during dynamic
simulations.

Liquid Head for Decanter

To model the pressure effect of liquid head on the outlet streams,
the parameter LiquidHead needs to be set to Yes:
Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value
LiquidHead Liquid outlet pressure includes No No
hydrostatic head Yes
The pressure effect takes into consideration the liquid level and the
liquid outlet stream elevation change. The liquid outlet stream
elevation change needs to be specified:
Variable Description Default Value
Veshead Liquid outlet stream elevation 0
change

Level Control for Decanter

Level controllers are automatically added to the flowsheet when
appropriate.
For flow-driven simulations:
Controller When Measured variable Manipulated variable
added
Liquid Level Always Liquid level Liquid 1 required mass flow
rate
Interface Level Always Liquid interface level Liquid 2 required mass flow
rate

3-16 • Separators Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 For pressure-driven simulations:
Checks are made during the export from Aspen Plus to see if there
is a valve on each outlet stream of the Decanter block. If a valve is
present in the current hierarchy, then the controller will manipulate
the valve position.
Controller added When Measured variable Manipulated variable
Liquid Level Always Liquid level Valve position for the valve
on the liquid 1 outlet stream
Interface Level Always Liquid interface level Valve position for the valve
on the liquid 2 outlet stream
If no valve is present in the current hierarchy, then the controller
output is not connected and you should connect the controller
output (OP) to an appropriate manipulated variable elsewhere in
the flowsheet.
This is normally sufficient to ensure that the dynamic simulation
runs at steady state until a disturbance is introduced. For some
processes, you may need to add temperature controllers to ensure
that the dynamic simulation runs at steady state, particularly if you
are using the Constant Duty option to model heat transfer in a
block.
Reverse Flow for Decanter is supported in reverse flow simulations. When
Decanter in Dynamic configuring your simulation for reverse flow, use the RFlowPhase
Simulations parameter on the Decanter Configure form to specify which phase
in the Decanter will flow out through the feed stream(s) if the
pressure gradients cause the flows in those streams to reverse. You
can select the 1st liquid phase (Liquid1), the 2nd liquid phase
(Liquid2) or a homogeneous mixture of the two (Mixed) with the
same phase fractions as in the Decanter. The default value is
Mixed.
When reverse flow is enabled, material flow may enter or exit
Decanter via any of its connected streams, depending on the
pressure gradients around the flowsheet.
Note If you specify a pressure drop for Decanter in Aspen Plus,
the inlet stream pressure will not equal the block pressure and, for
the dynamic simulation, the inlet pressure change will be fixed to
the steady state value. Upon export to Aspen Dynamics, the
Pressure Checker will warn you that this fixed pressure drop will
not vary with flow rate. If you ignore this warning when using
Decanter in reverse flow simulations, when the flow reverses you
may get misleading results and/or convergence problems. You can
avoid this by specifying the inlet pressure drop in Decanter to zero

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Separators • 3-17

 and modeling an inlet pressure drop that does vary with flow rate
using a Valve.
For more information, see Creating a Reverse Flow Simulation in
Chapter 3 of the Aspen Dynamics User Guide.
Specifying Decanter Use the Decanter Dynamic form to add the specifications for
for Dynamic dynamic simulations.
Simulations Decanter can represent:
• A vertical vessel (default)
• A horizontal vessel
You must also specify the vessel geometry.
For vertical and horizontal vessels you can choose to model
equipment heat capacity and heat transfer with the environment.

Specifying Vessel Geometry for Decanter in Dynamic

Simulations
Choose one of these head types:
• 2:1 elliptical (default)
• Hemispherical
• Flat plate
Specify the vessel size:
If the heads are Specify this and internal diameter
Elliptical Tangent to tangent length
Hemispherical Tangent to tangent length
Flat plate Internal length

For more information about vessel geometry, see the Aspen

Dynamics User Guide, Chapter 1.

Specifying the Initial Conditions for Decanter in Dynamic

Simulations
You can use the initial liquid volume fraction to specify the initial
volume of liquid in the vessel, that is, the total volume of both
liquid phases in the vessel at the start of the simulation as a
fraction of the total volume of the vessel. The default value is 0.5.
You can also specify the initial liquid 1 volume fraction. This is
the volume of the liquid 1 phase in the vessel at the start of the
simulation, divided by the total liquid volume. If you do not
specify a value, then the model calculates the initial liquid 1
volume using the steady state liquid ratio (beta).

3-18 • Separators Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 Specifying Equipment Heat Transfer for Decanter in Dynamic
Simulations
For vertical and horizontal vessels, you can choose to model
equipment heat capacity and heat transfer with the environment:
If you model You must enter
Equipment Heat Capacity The mass of the vessel
The specific heat capacity
Heat Transfer with the Environment The overall heat transfer coefficient.
The ambient temperature on the Setup
Specifications Global sheet.

Sep in Dynamic Simulations

Sep can be used in place of a rigorous separation model to save
computation time when details of the separation are unknown or
unimportant but the splits for each component are known. Reverse
flow is not supported.
Sep separates an inlet stream into two or more outlet streams,
according to splits specified for each component.
Before you can export a Sep block, you must go to the Outlet sheet
of the Sep Input form, and ensure that the Flash Stream check box
is checked for each outlet stream.
The Sep model has no dynamic features.

Pressure/Flow Effects for Sep

For the Sep model, outlet pressures are fixed at their steady-state
values. The outlet flow rates are determined by material balance.

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Separators • 3-19

 Sep2 in Dynamic Simulations
Sep2 combines streams and separates the resulting stream into two
outlet streams. Sep2 is similar to Sep, except Sep2 offers a wider
variety of specifications, for example, the purity (mole fraction)
specification of a component can be specified. It does not support
reverse flow.
Sep2 can be used to model a separation process where details of
separation are not known.
Sep2 has no dynamic features.

Pressure/Flow Effects for Sep2

For the Sep2 model, the outlet pressures are fixed at their steady-
state values. The outlet flow rates are determined by material
balance.

3-20 • Separators Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

4 Heat Exchangers

This chapter describes:

• Heater
• HeatX
• MHeatX

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Heat Exchangers • 4-1

 Heater in Dynamic Simulations
Heater has no dynamic features, but it supports reverse flow.
Pressure/Flow Effects The pressure drop in the heater is related to the outlet volumetric
for Heater flow rate by:
∆P = K ⋅ Rho ⋅ Fv _ out 2

Where:
K = A constant determined by fitting to steady-
state conditions
∆P = Pressure drop
Rho = Mass density at outlet conditions
Fv_out = Outlet volumetric flow rate
If the steady-state simulation predicts a pressure rise, the pressure
drop equation is not used. Instead the pressure difference will be
specified.
Reverse Flow for Heater is supported in reverse flow simulations. No additional
Heater in Dynamic specifications are required to configure Heater for reverse flow.
Simulations When reverse flow is enabled, Heater is modeled as an
instantaneous mixer followed by a single input, single outlet flow
resistance with heat transfer. Therefore, depending on the local
pressure gradients during simulation, it is possible for some of the
feed streams to be in forward flow and some to be in reverse flow,
so bypassing the flow resistance/heat transfer section of model and
not receiving the Heater duty.
Notes:
• When using Heater in reverse flow simulations, it is
recommended that you do not use Constant Duty for the Heat
Transfer Option. Instead, it is better to use either the Constant
Temperature or LMTD Heat Transfer Option in Heater to
model the heat transfer in a more realistic manner. The reason
for this follows:
With a fixed heat duty, as the flow rate becomes small, the
process temperature is driven above its upper bound towards
infinity. To avoid this, an in-built procedure in Aspen
Dynamics attempts to ramp the fixed duty to zero to keep the
temperature within its bounds. However, when the flow
reverses, the possibility of a discontinuity in the temperature
can lead to convergence problems with this procedure.
• It is recommended that you use Calculated for the Pressure
Drop Option when using Heater in reverse flow simulations. If
you use Fixed for the Pressure Drop Option, the pressure drop

4-2 • Heat Exchangers Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 across Heater will not vary with flow rate, which will result in
unrealistic behavior when the flow reverses during a dynamic
simulation.
For more information, see Creating a Reverse Flow Simulation in
Chapter 3 of the Aspen Dynamics User Guide.
Specifying Heat Three methods of calculating heating or cooling within the heater
Transfer for Heater in are available. Choose one of these heat transfer calculation
Dynamic Simulations methods:

If you choose Specify Description

Constant duty~ No additional input Duty is specified. Initially
(default) duty is equal to the steady-
state value but you can
manipulate it during the
simulation either manually or
by using a controller. A
useful approximation for
many situations.
Constant temperature Medium temperature Corresponds to the case
where you have a condensing
or boiling fluid exchanging
its latent heat.
LMTD Inlet temperature of the medium Corresponds to the case
Heat capacity of the medium where you have a fluid
whose temperature changes
Initial closest temperature approach
as it exchanges sensible heat.
between medium and process fluid
Initial medium flow rate is
automatically calculated, but
you can manipulate it during
the simulation either
manually or by using a
controller.

For more details of these methods, see the Aspen Dynamics User
Guide, Chapter 1.

HeatX in Dynamic Simulations

The dynamic HeatX model performs a shortcut rating calculation
and assumes that:
• The exchanger area is automatically set to the steady-state
value. If you have specified the exchanger geometry for the
steady-state simulation, HeatX uses the calculated area.

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Heat Exchangers • 4-3

 • The LMTD correction factor is constant. It is automatically set
to the steady-state value.
• The overall heat transfer coefficient is either a constant in
which case it is automatically set to the steady-state value or it
can vary with flowrate.
• The dynamic characteristics of the heat exchanger are modeled
by including the holdups in each side of the heat exchanger.
• A simple pressure drop-flow equation is used to model the
pressure drop.
You can select either an instantaneous or dynamic model type. The
instantaneous model type does not model dynamic effects.
The HeatX model supports reverse flow.

HeatX Holdup Effects

If the dynamic model is selected, the dynamic characteristics of the
heat exchanger are modeled by accounting for the holdup on each
side of the exchanger.
The total volume for each side is split between two volumes—one
each at the inlet and outlet of the side as shown in the following
diagram:

Hot side Outlet volume

Inlet volume

Pressure Heat
drop here transfer

Outlet volume Inlet volume

Cold side

Pressure/Flow Effects for HeatX

For the hot and cold sides of the heat exchanger, the pressure drops
are related to the outlet volumetric flow rates by:
∆P = K ⋅ Rho ⋅ Fv _ out 2

Where:

4-4 • Heat Exchangers Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 K = A constant determined by fitting to steady-
state conditions
∆P = Pressure drop
Rho = Mass density at outlet conditions
Fv_out = Outlet volumetric flow rate
If you are using the dynamic model type, all pressure drop is
assumed to take place between the inlet and outlet volumes.
If the steady-state simulation predicts a pressure rise on either side
of the heat exchanger, the pressure drop equation is not used, and
the pressure difference for that side of the exchanger will be
specified.

Specifying the Overall Heat Transfer Coefficient for HeatX

To specify the overall heat transfer coefficient (U) open the
ConfigureU form for the relevant instance of the HeatX model on
the flowsheet.
The overall heat transfer coefficient can be calculated by the
following different methods:
• Constant
• Power law relationship based on hot-side
• Power law relationship based on cold-side
• Power law relationship based on hot-side and cold-side
• Film coefficient method
The method used is controlled by the HTCOpt parameter

Constant Method for HeatX

U is fixed and may be changed directly by the user

Power Law Relationship Based on Hot-side

U is based on the following relationship:
u exp
 Flow 
U = U _ ref . 
 Flow _ ref 

Where:
U_ref = Reference overall heat transfer coefficient
(value fixed by user)
Flow = Hot-side flowrate
Flow_ref = Reference hot-side flowrate (value fixed by
user)

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Heat Exchangers • 4-5

 Uexp = exponent (value fixed by user)
The flow can be either on a molar or mass basis determined by the
state of the HTCBasis parameter.

Power Law Relationship Based on Cold-side

U is based on the following relationship:
u exp
 Flow 
U = U _ ref . 
 Flow _ ref 

Where:
U_ref is Reference overall heat transfer coefficient
(value fixed by user)
Flow is Cold-side flowrate
Flow_ref is Reference cold-side flowrate (value fixed by
user)
Uexp is exponent (value fixed by user)
The flow can be either on a molar or mass basis determined by the
state of the HTCBasis parameter.

Power Law Relationship Based on Hot-side and Cold-side

U is based on the following relationship:
u exp_ hot u exp_ cold
 Flow _ hot   Flow _ cold 
U = U _ ref ×   ×  
 Flow _ hot _ ref   Flow _ cold _ ref 

Where:
U_ref is Reference overall heat transfer
coefficient (value fixed by user)
Flow_hot is Hot-side flowrate
Flow_hot_ref is Reference hot-side flowrate (value fixed by
user)
Uexp_hot is Hot-side exponent (value fixed by
user)
Flow_cold is Cold-side flowrate
Flow_cold_ref is Reference cold-side flowrate (value fixed by
user)
Uexp_cold Cold-side exponent (value fixed by
user)

4-6 • Heat Exchangers Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 The flow can be either on a molar or mass basis determined by the
state of the HTCBasis parameter.

Film Coefficient Method

U is based on the following relationship:
D 
Do .1n  o 
1 1 D 1  Di 
= + o . +
U h SHELL D i hTUBE 2. Kw

Where:
h is Film heat transfer coefficient
D is Diameter
KW is Tube metal thermal conductivity
Subscripts:
SHELL : Shell-side
TUBE : Tube-side
o : Outer tube
i : Inner tube
and
u exp
 Flow 
h = h _ ref .  
 Flow _ ref 

for both shell and tube sides

Note For constant h, specify h_ref = h, uexp = 0 and Flow_ref =
1.
Reverse Flow for The film coefficients are defined for the hot and cold side rather
HeatX in Dynamic than shell and tube for compatibility with Aspen Plus. You need to
Simulations specify if the hot side is on the shell or tube via the CalcType
parameter. The film coefficient method is not available if
CalcType is defined as shortcut.
HeatX is supported in reverse flow simulations. No additional
specifications are required to configure HeatX for reverse flow.
When reverse flow is enabled, the flow direction used for the
calculation of the logarithmic mean temperature difference
(LMTD) is adjusted during dynamic simulation, based on the
current hot and cold side flow directions. For example, if you
specify a Countercurrent flow direction in Aspen Plus, and during
a reverse flow simulation the Hot Side flow reverses, HeatX then
uses Co-current method for the calculation of the LMTD.

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Heat Exchangers • 4-7

 Note It is recommended that you use Calculated for the Hot Side
and Cold Side Pressure Drop Options when using HeatX in reverse
flow simulations. If you use Fixed for the Pressure Drop Options,
the pressure drops across HeatX will not vary with flow rate,
which will result in unrealistic behavior when the flow reverses
during a dynamic simulation.
For more information, see Creating a Reverse Flow Simulation in
Chapter 3 of the Aspen Dynamics User Guide.
Specifying HeatX for Use the HeatX Dynamic form to add the specifications for
Dynamic Simulations dynamic simulations. Specify the volume for the inlet and outlet on
each side of the exchanger.
Use the time constants shown in this table as a guide for
calculating the volume when the exchanger dimensions are
unknown:
Phase Shell Side Tube Side
Liquid/Mixed 15 minutes 5 minutes
Vapor 3 seconds 1 second

An approximate volume for the inlet and outlet on a given side of

the exchanger can then be calculated from:
volume = (residence time ) * (steady state volumetric flow rate ) / 2

If you have data on the dynamics of your plant, you can adjust
these volumes to give a good match to your data.
For dynamic heat exchangers you can choose to model equipment
heat capacity and heat transfer with the environment.

Specifying Equipment Heat Transfer for HeatX in Dynamic

Simulations
For dynamic heat exchangers you can choose to model equipment
heat capacity and heat transfer with the environment:
If you model You must enter
Equipment Heat Capacity The specific heat capacity
The mass of the exchanger associated with
each of the dynamic volumes
Heat Transfer with the The area for heat transfer with the
Environment environment associated with each of the
dynamic volumes
The overall heat transfer coefficient
The ambient temperature on the Setup
Specifications Global sheet

4-8 • Heat Exchangers Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 MHeatX in Dynamic Simulations
The dynamic MHeatX model performs a shortcut rating
calculation and assumes that:
• The product of the overall heat transfer coefficient and the
exchanger area (UA) for each zone is a constant which is
automatically set to the steady-state value.
• The dynamic characteristics of the heat exchanger are modeled
by including the holdups in each stream of the heat exchanger.
• A simple pressure drop-flow equation is used to model the
pressure drop.
• A zone analysis is performed in the steady-state simulation.
You can select either an instantaneous or dynamic model type. The
instantaneous model type does not model dynamic effects.
MHeatX supports reverse flow.
The heat leakage option is not supported in Aspen Dynamics. If
you wish to calculate heat transfer with the environment, you can
include this in the dynamic model. For more information on this,
see page 4-12.

MHeatX Holdup Effects

If the dynamic model is selected, the dynamic characteristics of the
heat exchanger are modeled by accounting for the holdup of each
stream.
The total volume for each stream is split between two volumes—
one each at the inlet and outlet of the side as shown in the
following diagram:

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Heat Exchangers • 4-9

 Hot stream
Inlet volume Outlet volume

Pressure Heat
drop here transfer

Outlet volume Inlet volume

Cold stream
Pressure/Flow Effects for MHeatX
For each stream, the pressure drops are related to the outlet
volumetric flow rates by:
∆P = K ⋅ Rho ⋅ Fv _ out 2

Where:
K = A constant determined by fitting to steady-
state conditions
∆P = Pressure drop
Rho = Mass density at outlet conditions
Fv_out = Outlet volumetric flow rate
If you are using the dynamic model type, all pressure drop is
assumed to take place between the inlet and outlet volumes.
If the steady-state simulation predicts a pressure rise, the pressure
drop equation is not used, and the pressure difference for that
stream will be specified.
Reverse Flow for MHeatX is supported in reverse flow simulations. No additional
MHeatX in Dynamic specifications are required to configure MHeatX for reverse flow.
Simulations When reverse flow is enabled, the flow direction used for the
calculation of the logarithmic mean temperature difference
(LMTD) in each MHeatX stream is adjusted during dynamic
simulation, based on the current hot and cold side flow directions.
For example, if you specify a Countercurrent flow direction in
Aspen Plus, and during a reverse flow simulation the Hot Side
flow reverses, MHeatX will then use a Co-current method for the
calculation of the LMTD. Note that the exchanger configuration

4-10 • Heat Exchangers Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 represents the physical connection of each stream and will
therefore remain fixed.
Note It is recommended that you use Calculated for the Hot
Stream and Cold Stream Pressure Drop Options when using
MHeatX in reverse flow simulations. If you use Fixed for the
Pressure Drop Options, the pressure drops across each zone in
MHeatX will not vary with flow rate, which will result in
unrealistic behavior when the flow reverses during a dynamic
simulation.
For more information, see Creating a Reverse Flow Simulation in
Chapter 3 of the Aspen Dynamics User Guide.
Specifying MHeatX in To export a dynamic simulation for a flowsheet containing
Dynamic Simulations MHeatX blocks, you must perform a zone analysis in the steady-
state simulation and include Exchanger zone profiles and Stream
profiles in the results.
To perform a zone analysis, use the Zone Analysis form to:
• Enter the number of zones
• Select the flow direction (countercurrent or co-current)
• Select Add extra zone points for phase change, and stream
entry and exit
• If the exchanger profile is non-linear, select Add extra zones in
regions where the profile is non-linear.
To include Exchanger zone profiles and Stream profiles in the
results, use the Options form to:
• Check Exchanger zone profiles
• Stream profiles
Use the MHeatX Dynamic form to add the specifications for
dynamic simulations. Specify the volume for each stream.
Use the time constants shown in this table as a guide for
calculating the volume when the exchanger dimensions are
unknown:
Phase Shell Side Tube Side
Liquid/Mixed 15 minutes 5 minutes
Vapor 3 seconds 1 second

An approximate volume for the inlet and outlet on a given side of

the exchanger can then be calculated from:

volume = ( residencetime ) * ( steadystatevolumetricflowrate )

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Heat Exchangers • 4-11

 If you have data on the dynamics of your plant, you can adjust
these volumes to give a good match to your data.
For dynamic heat exchangers you can choose to model equipment
heat capacity and heat transfer with the environment.

Specifying Equipment Heat Transfer for MHeatX in Dynamic

Simulations
For dynamic heat exchangers you can choose to model equipment
heat capacity and heat transfer with the environment:
If you model You must enter in Aspen Plus You must enter in
Aspen Dynamics
Equipment Heat Capacity The specific heat capacity —
The mass of the exchanger associated
with each of the dynamic volumes
Heat Transfer with the The ambient temperature on the Setup The UA for heat transfer with the
Environment Specifications Global sheet environment associated with each
stream
Hot-Hot and Cold-Cold Heat — The UA for hot-hot and cold-cold
Transfer heat transfer for each stream

4-12 • Heat Exchangers Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

5 Columns

This chapter describes:

• Distl, the model for shortcut distillation
• PetroFrac, the model for rigorous petroleum distillation
• RadFrac, the unit operation model for rigorous distillation
• The equations used for hydraulic and pressure drop
calculations in RadFrac and PetroFrac
• Extract, the model for liquid-liquid extraction

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Columns • 5-1

 Distl in Dynamic Simulations
Use Distl to represent a single-feed, two-product distillation
column. Distl uses the shortcut Edmister group method (Edmister,
1957).
Distl models dynamics using a compartmentation approach where
stages are lumped together into compartments. You must enter a
molar holdup for each compartment. This holdup is the sum of the
liquid holdups within that compartment.
Distl assumes:
• Uni-directional flow (reverse flow is not supported)
• Instantaneous equilibrium
• Constant relative volatility
• Constant molar overflow
• Only the liquid holdup is accounted for in each compartment
• The liquid molar holdup in each compartment is fixed
Distl does not support free-water calculations.

Pressure/Flow Effects for Distl

The condenser and the reboiler pressure are both fixed at the
steady-state values. The distillate and bottoms flow rates are all
determined by the material balance.
Specifying Distl for Use the Distl Dynamic form to add the specifications for dynamic
Dynamic Simulations simulations. You must specify:
• The average number of stages to be lumped into a compartment
• The liquid molar holdup on the feed plate
• The liquid molar holdup in the sump
• The liquid molar holdup in the reflux drum
• The liquid molar holdup in each compartment of the column

References for Distl

Edmister, W.C., (1957) Absorption and Stripping Factor Functions
for Distillation Calculations by Manual- and Digital-Computer
Methods, A.I.Ch.E. Journal, Vol. 3, pp. 157-171.

5-2 • Columns Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 Extract in Dynamic Simulations
Use Extract to represent two-phase countercurrent liquid-liquid
extractors.
The Extract model is divided into stages. Extract assumes
• Uni-directional flow (reverse flow is not supported)
• Each stage has the same volume
As in the steady-state Extract model, you can specify either the
stage or component efficiencies.
The dynamic model does not support pseudo streams or use of user
Fortran subroutines for KLL calculations.

Pressure/Flow Effects for Extract

The pressure at each stage is fixed at the same value as for the
steady-state simulation.
For each stage, the flow rates of the side draws are set at their
steady-state values. The top and bottom outlet flow rates are
determined by the mass balance for the model.
Specifying Extract for Use the Extract Dynamic form to add the specifications for
Dynamic Simulations dynamic simulations. Specify this variable:
• Stage volume
For each stage, specify this variable:
• Liquid 2 volume fraction (default = 0.5)
This volume fraction is the ratio of the second liquid phase volume
to the total volume on a stage. This is assumed to be constant
throughout the dynamic simulation.

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Columns • 5-3

 RadFrac in Dynamic Simulations
Dynamic RadFrac may be used in the same applications as the
steady-state model. However, when modeling reactive distillation,
you can specify only rate-based reactions on the stages using the
React-Dist or User reaction types. Equilibrium reactions are not
supported in the dynamic model.
Other features that are not supported in dynamic simulations are
user-KLL, polynomial KLL, VL1/LL prop-sections, different VL1
and VL2 efficiencies, and thermosyphon reboilers that use the
above-stage return convention.
In dynamic mode, RadFrac models the pressure drop across each
stage due to the head of liquid and vapor flow resistance. Stage
hydraulics are also modeled.
To ensure consistency between the Aspen Plus and Aspen Custom
Modeler simulations, check that you have a realistic column
pressure drop in your Aspen Plus simulation. If the pressure drop
in the Aspen Plus simulation is unrealistically small, Aspen
Dynamics will not be able to generate a dynamic simulation.
Dynamic RadFrac contains five key model elements:
• Stage
• Overhead system
• Bottoms system
• Decanter
• Pumparound heat exchangers
For all the model elements, RadFrac assumes:
• Uni-directional flow (reverse flow is not supported)
• Perfect mixing
• All phases are in equilibrium unless a vaporization or
Murphree efficiency has been specified. Efficiencies are
assumed constant throughout the dynamic simulation.
The following sections describe the dynamics for each of the
model elements of RadFrac.

RadFrac Stage Dynamics

You can specify either simple default, or rigorous, tray or packing
correlations to model hydraulics and pressure drop.

5-4 • Columns Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 For more information on the equations used and on making the
specifications, see Column Hydraulic and Pressure Drop
Equations and Specifying the Hydraulics for RadFrac.

RadFrac Overhead System Dynamics

The overhead system model assumes:
• Material and energy balances in the condenser are
instantaneous. In other words, dynamic effects are not
modeled.
• There is no entrainment between phases.
• The reflux drum is perfectly mixed.
• The holdup in the reflux drum is modeled.
In the reflux drum, both liquid and vapor holdup are modeled. The
liquid reflux flow rate is specified. There is no hydraulic equation
for reflux flow.

RadFrac Bottoms System Dynamics

The bottoms system model assumes:
• There is no entrainment between phases.
• The thermosyphon reboiler, if present, is instantaneous. In
other words, dynamic effects are not modeled.
For a thermosyphon reboiler, the recirculation rate is related to the
duty using a simplified model:
1
recirculation _ rate = R. duty 3

The constant R is determined by fitting to the steady-state results.

RadFrac Decanter Dynamics

The decanter model assumes:
• Vapor holdup is not modeled.
• There is no entrainment between phases.

RadFrac Pumparound Dynamics

The pumparound model assumes material and energy balances are
instantaneous. In other words, dynamic effects are not modeled.
Pressure/Flow Effects The pressure in the top stage, whether it is a reflux drum or a
for RadFrac normal tray, is always determined from the conditions on that
stage, that is the temperature and the composition.
For other stages:

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Columns • 5-5

 • Pressure difference between stages is determined using a
pressure drop flow equation.
• Flow rates from stages are related to the liquid holdup on the
stage using a hydraulics equation.
For details of the hydraulics and pressure drop flow equations, see
Column Hydraulic and Pressure Drop Equations.

Liquid Head for RadFrac

The modeling of the pressure effect of liquid head is only
considered in the following areas:
The Top Product Stage or the Reflux Drum
To model the effect at the top product stage or in the Reflux drum,
the parameter LiquidHeadRF needs to be set to Yes:

Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value

LiquidHeadRF Reflux drum liquid outlet No No
pressure includes hydrostatic Yes
head
You need to specify the drum or top stage liquid outlet stream
elevation change:

Variable Description Default Value

Veshead Reflux drum liquid outlet stream 0
elevation change

The Bottom Product Stage or the Reboiler

To model the effect at the bottom product stage or in the Reboiler,
the parameter LiquidHeadRB needs to be set to Yes:

Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value

LiquidHeadRB Reboiler liquid outlet pressure No No
includes hydrostatic head Yes
You need to specify the reboiler or bottom product stage liquid
outlet stream elevation change:

Variable Description Default Value

Veshead Reboiler liquid outlet 0
stream elevation change

5-6 • Columns Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 The Decanter
To model the effects in the decanter, the parameter LiquidHead
needs to be set to Yes:

Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value

LiquidHead Liquid outlet pressure includes No No
hydrostatic head Yes

You need to specify the decanter liquid outlet stream elevation

change:

Variable Description Default Value

Veshead Decanter liquid outlet 0
stream elevation change

Flow of Bottoms Product Stream

For the bottoms product stream, any liquid distillate product
stream, and any total liquid draw stream going to a pumparound or
a decanter:
• The flow rate of the stream is initially fixed at the steady-state
value. It can be manipulated manually, or by using a controller
to control the total liquid level in the stage from which the
stream comes.

Flow of Distillate Product Stream

For any distillate product stream, bottoms products stream, or total
draw of a second liquid phase:
• The flow rate of the stream is initially at the steady-state value.
It can be manipulated to control the liquid interface level in the
stage from which the stream comes.

Flow of Vapor Distillate Stream or Total Vapor Draw

For any vapor distillate stream, or total vapor draw from a stage:
• The flow rate of the stream is initially fixed at the steady-state
value. It can be manipulated manually, or by using a controller
to control the pressure in the stage from which the stream
comes.

Flow for Decanters in a Column

For any decanters in a column:

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Columns • 5-7

 • The pressure drop in the decanter is fixed at the steady-state
value.
• The flow rate of the product stream of liquid phase one is
initially at the steady-state value. It can be manipulated to
control the total liquid level in the decanter during a dynamic
run.
• The flow rate of the product stream of liquid phase two is
initially fixed at the steady-state value. It can be manipulated
manually, or by using a controller to control the liquid
interface level in the decanter.

Flow for Pumparounds in a Column

For any pumparounds in a column:
• The pressure drop in the pumparound is fixed at the steady-
state value.
• The pumparound is instantaneous, that is, it does not have any
dynamics. The flow rate of the outlet stream from the
pumparound is determined by the material balance.
• The flow rate of the inlet stream to the pumparound is as
specified on the RadFrac Pumparound form.

Pressure and Level Pressure and level controllers are automatically added to the
Control for RadFrac flowsheet when appropriate.
For flow-driven simulations:

Controller When Measured Manipulated

Added Variable Variable
Pressure If there is a vapor distillate Top stage pressure Vapor distillate flow
product stream rate
Pressure If there is no vapor distillate Top stage pressure Condenser heat duty or
product stream cooling medium
temperature or cooling
medium flow rate
Level If there is a reflux drum and a Reflux drum liquid level Liquid distillate mass
liquid distillate product stream flow rate
Level If there is a reflux drum and no Reflux drum liquid level Liquid reflux mass
liquid distillate product stream flow rate
Level If there is a reflux drum and a Reflux drum liquid interface level Liquid 2 distillate mass
distillate product stream of flow rate
liquid phase two
Level Always Sump liquid level Bottoms liquid mass
flow rate
Level If there is a total liquid draw Stage i liquid level, where i is the Stage i liquid draw

5-8 • Columns Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 stream going to a pumparound stage from which the mass flow rate
or a decanter draw comes
Level For any decanter Decanter i liquid level, where Decanter i liquid 1
i is the stage number of the draw mass flow rate
decanter
Level For any decanter Decanter i liquid interface level, Decanter i liquid 2
where i is the stage number of the draw mass flow rate
decanter

For pressure-driven simulations:

Checks are made during the export from Aspen Plus to see if there
is a valve on each outlet stream of the RadFrac block. If a valve is
present in the current hierarchy, then the controller will manipulate
the valve position:

Controller When Measured Manipulated

Added Variable Variable
Pressure If there is a vapor distillate Top stage pressure Valve position for the valve
product stream on the vapor distillate
stream
Pressure If there is no vapor distillate Top stage pressure Condenser heat duty, or
product stream cooling medium
temperature, or cooling
medium flow rate
Level If there is a reflux drum and a Reflux drum liquid level Valve position for the valve
liquid distillate product on the liquid distillate
stream stream
Level If there is a reflux drum and a Reflux drum liquid interface Valve position for the valve
distillate product stream of level on the liquid 2 distillate
liquid phase two stream
Level Always Sump liquid level Valve position for the valve
on the bottoms stream
Level For any decanter Decanter i liquid level, Valve position for the valve
where i is the stage on the Decanter i liquid 1
number of the decanter draw stream
Level For any decanter Decanter i liquid interface level, Valve position for the valve
where i is the stage number of on the Decanter i liquid 2
the decanter draw stream
If no valve is present in the current hierarchy, then the controller
output is not connected and you should connect the controller
output (OP) to an appropriate manipulated variable elsewhere in
the flowsheet.

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Columns • 5-9

 Automatically adding controllers is normally sufficient to ensure
that the dynamic simulation runs at steady state until a disturbance
is introduced. For some processes, you may need to add
temperature controllers to ensure that the dynamic simulation runs
at steady state, particularly if you are using the Constant Duty
option to model heat transfer in a block.
The following diagrams show how these rules apply in practice.
The first diagram shows an inventory control arrangement for the
overheads of a column with a liquid distillate product only.
Pressure is controlled by manipulating the duty, coolant
temperature, or coolant flow rate of the condenser. The level in the
reflux drum is controlled by manipulating the liquid distillate flow
rate.
PC

Reflux Drum

LC

Reflux Liquid Distillate

Typical overhead inventory control configuration for a column with no vapor

distillate product

5-10 • Columns Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 The second diagram shows an inventory control arrangement for
the overheads of a column with both liquid and vapor distillate
products. Here, pressure is controlled by manipulating the vapor
flow rate from the reflux drum. The level in the reflux drum is
controlled by manipulating the liquid distillate flow rate.
PC Vapor Distillate

Reflux Drum

LC

Reflux Liquid Distillate

Typical overhead inventory control configuration for a column with a vapor

distillate product

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Columns • 5-11

 The following diagram shows an inventory control arrangement
for the overheads of a three-phase column with liquid 1 and liquid
2 distillate product streams. Here the overall level in the reflux
drum is controlled by manipulating the liquid 1 distillate flow rate
and the interface level in the reflux drum is controlled by
manipulating the liquid 2 distillate flow.
PC

Reflux Drum

LC

ILC

Liquid 1 Distillate
Liquid 1 Reflux

Liquid Liquid 2 Distillate

Typical overhead inventory control configuration for a column with liquid 1

and liquid 2 distillate streams

The following diagram shows the inventory control arrangement

for the sump and reboiler of a column. The liquid level in the sump
is always controlled by manipulating the bottoms product flow
rate.

LC

Bottoms
Default sump inventory control configuration

5-12 • Columns Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 A Relief port is available to allow simulation of relief scenarios.
Specifying RadFrac
for Pressure Relief
Specifying RadFrac To specify the overall heat transfer coefficient (U) for either the
Overall Heat Transfer condenser or themosyphon reboiler:
Coefficient • Open the Configure form for the relevant submodel of the
instance of the RadFrac model on the flowsheet.
The overall heat transfer coefficient can be calculated by these
different methods:
• Constant
• Power law relationship based on process-side
• Power law relationship based on heating/cooling medium-side
• Film coefficient method
The method used is controlled by the HTCOpt parameter.

Constant Method
U is fixed and may be changed directly by the user

Power Law Relationship Based on One Side of the Exchanger

U is based on the following relationship:
u exp
 Flow 
U = U _ ref . 
 Flow _ ref 

Where:
U_ref is Reference overall heat transfer coefficient
(value fixed by user)
Flow is Actual flowrate
Flow_ref is Reference flowrate (value fixed by user)
Uexp is exponent (value fixed by user)
For the process side the flow can be either on a molar or mass
basis determined by the state of the HTCBasis parameter. The
medium side is always be on a mass basis.

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Columns • 5-13

 Film Coefficient Method
D 
Do .1n  o 
1 1 D 1  Di 
= + o . +
U h SHELL D i hTUBE 2. Kw

Where:
h is Film heat transfer coefficient
D is Diameter
KW is Tube metal thermal conductivity
Subscripts:
SHELL : Shell-side
TUBE : Tube-side
o : Outer tube
i : Inner tube
and
u exp
 Flow 
h = h _ ref .  
 Flow _ ref 

for both shell and tube sides

Note For constant h, specify h_ref = h, uexp = 0 and
Flow_ref = 1.
The film coefficients are defined for the process and medium side
rather than shell and tube. For the condenser you need to specify if
the process side is on the shell or tube via the CalcType parameter.
The film coefficient method is not available if CalcType is defined
as shortcut. For the thermosyphon reboiler the process is always
assumed to be on the tube-side.

5-14 • Columns Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 Specifying RadFrac Use the RadFrac Dynamic form to add the specifications for
for Dynamic dynamic simulations:
Simulations
On this sheet Specify
Condenser and Reboiler The heat transfer in the condenser and the
reboiler
Sump The column sump geometry
The initial liquid volume fraction in the sump
The initial liquid 1 volume fraction in the
sump (optional)
Reflux Drum The reflux drum geometry
The initial liquid volume fraction in the reflux
drum
The initial liquid 1 volume fraction in the
reflux drum (optional)
Hydraulics The hydraulics method to be used
The tray or packing geometry for all stages in
the column
Decanter The decanter drum geometry for each decanter
The initial liquid volume fraction in the
decanter drum for each decanter
The initial liquid 1 volume fraction in the
decanter drum for each decanter (optional)

For RadFrac you can choose to model equipment heat capacity and
heat transfer with the environment for the Reflux Drum, Sump and
Stages.

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Columns • 5-15

 Specifying Heat Transfer in the Condenser and Reboiler for
RadFrac
If the column has a condenser or a reboiler, you can enter details of
the heat exchangers. To model heat transfer, choose one of the
following options and specify the appropriate additional input:

If you choose Specify Description

Constant duty (default) No additional input Duty is specified. It is initially equal
to the steady-state value but you can
manipulate it during the simulation
either manually or by using a
controller. A useful approximation
for many situations.
Constant temperature Medium temperature Corresponds to the case where you
have a condensing or boiling fluid
exchanging its latent heat.
LMTD Inlet temperature of the Corresponds to the case where you
medium have a fluid whose temperature
Heat capacity of the medium changes as it exchanges sensible
heat. Initial medium flow rate is
Initial closest temperature
automatically calculated, but you
approach between medium
can manipulate it during the
and process fluid
simulation either manually or by
using a controller.
Dynamic Inlet temperature of the Corresponds to the case when you
medium. have a well-mixed heating/cooling
Heat capacity of the jacket.
medium
Initial closest temperature
approach between medium
and process fluid
Mass holdup of the medium

Specifying the Sump for RadFrac

You can specify the geometry (head type and size) of the column
sump.
Choose one of these head types:
• 2:1 elliptical (default)
• Hemispherical
• Flat plate

5-16 • Columns Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 Specify the column sump size:

If the heads are Specify this and internal diameter

Elliptical Tangent to tangent height
Hemispherical Tangent to tangent height
Flat plate Internal height

The modeling approach lumps the reboiler volume with the sump
volume. You should allow for this when entering the sump size.
For more information about vessel geometry, see the Aspen
Dynamics User Guide, Chapter 1.
If one or more liquid phases are present, specify the initial liquid
volume fraction in the column sump. The default value is 0.5.
If two liquid phases are present and there are separate product
streams for each liquid phase, you can specify the initial liquid 1
volume fraction in the column sump. If you do not specify a value,
then the model calculates the initial liquid 1 volume using the
steady state liquid ratio (beta).

Specifying the Reflux Drum for RadFrac

If the column has a condenser and, therefore, a reflux drum, you
can specify the geometry (orientation, head type, and size) of the
drum.
Choose one of these drum types:
• A vertical drum (default)
• A horizontal drum
Choose one of these head types:
• 2:1 elliptical (default)
• Hemispherical
• Flat plate
Specify the drum size:

If the heads are Specify this and internal diameter

Elliptical Tangent to tangent length
Hemispherical Tangent to tangent length
Flat plate Internal length

For more information about vessel geometry, see the Aspen

Dynamics User Guide, Chapter 1.

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Columns • 5-17

 If a reflux drum is present, specify the initial liquid volume
fraction in it. The initial liquid volume fraction is the volume of
liquid in the reflux drum at the start of the simulation, divided by
the total volume of the reflux drum. The default value is 0.5.
If there is a top stage decanter with liquid1 and liquid 2 product
streams, you can specify the initial liquid 1 volume fraction in the
reflux drum. If you do not specify a value, then the model
calculates the initial liquid 1 volume using the steady state liquid
ratio (beta).

Specifying the Hydraulics for RadFrac

Use one of these methods to model the hydraulics and pressure
drop within a stage:
• Simple default tray or packing correlations
• The rigorous tray or packing correlations provided in Aspen
Plus®
For details of the equations used, see Column and Pressue Drop
Equations.
When you have a RadFrac block in a dynamic simulation that uses
rigorous hydraulics, you must always use the matching appdf file.
This is because, when using the rigorous tray or packing
correlations provided in Aspen Plus (TPSAR), Aspen Dynamics
uses the same subroutines as in Aspen Plus. The data structure
for this is defined in the appdf file, which is exported at the same
time as the dynamic simulation.

Selecting the Method for Hydraulic and Pressure Drop

Calculations
This table gives information about the types of correlations you
can use:
To Use in a Then
Dynamic Run
Rigorous tray For all stages in the steady-state run, you must have:
and packing • Carried out a single tray rating, packing rating, or packing sizing calculation
correlations
• Set the pressure update flag to YES
In addition, on the Hydraulics sheet, ensure the hydraulics method is set to Rigorous.
Simple tray Even if the rigorous correlations are used in the steady-state run, set the hydraulics
or packing method on the Hydraulics sheet, to Simple-Tray or Simple-Packing respectively.
correlations If you did not use rigorous correlations for the steady-state simulation, you will only be
able to use the simple tray correlations.
If you specify simple tray correlations, then for all stages in the column, you must
specify:

5-18 • Columns Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 • Diameter of tray section
• Spacing between trays (used to calculate tray volume and surface area)
• Weir height
• Ratio of weir length to column diameter
• Active area as a percentage of tray area
• Overall efficiency
If you specify simple packing correlations, then for all stages in the column, you must
specify:
• Diameter of packed section
• Height equivalent to a theoretical plate
• Initial liquid volume fraction in the packed section, that is the volume of liquid
present, divided by the volume of the section

Note You do not need to specify this information for the top and
bottom stages of the column when these correspond to the
condenser and reboiler. However, if there is no condenser or
reboiler, you must complete the specifications for these stages.

Specifying Decanters for RadFrac

If the column has a decanter, you must specify the geometry
(orientation, head type, and size) of the decanter.
Choose one of these drum types:
• A vertical drum (default)
• A horizontal drum
Choose one of these head types:
• 2:1 elliptical (default)
• Hemispherical
• Flat plate
Specify the drum size:

If the heads are Specify this and internal diameter

Elliptical Tangent to tangent length
Hemispherical Tangent to tangent length
Flat plate Internal length

For more information about vessel geometry, see the Aspen

Dynamics User Guide, Chapter 1.
Specify the initial liquid volume fraction in each decanter drum.
The initial liquid volume fraction is the volume of liquid in the

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Columns • 5-19

 drum at the start of the simulation, divided by the total volume of
the drum. The default value is 0.5.
If the decanter has liquid1 and liquid 2 product streams, you can
specify the initial liquid 1 volume fraction in the decanter. If you
do not specify a value, then the model calculates the initial liquid
volume using the steady state liquid ratio (beta).
For RadFrac you can choose to model equipment heat capacity and
heat transfer with the environment for the Reflux Drum, Sump and
Stages:
For If you choose You must enter
to model
Reflux Drum Equipment Heat Capacity The specific heat capacity and the
mass of vessel
Reflux Drum Heat Transfer with the Environment The overall heat transfer
coefficient
The ambient temperature on the
Setup Specifications Global sheet
Sump Equipment Heat Capacity The specific heat capacity
The mass of vessel
Sump Heat Transfer with the Environment The overall heat transfer
coefficient
The ambient temperature on the
Setup Specifications Global sheet
Stages Equipment Heat Capacity The specific heat capacity
The mass of each column section
Stages Heat Transfer with the Environment The overall heat transfer
coefficient
The ambient temperature on the
Setup Specifications Global sheet
Changing RadFrac The operating specifications for a RadFrac column in Aspen
Operating Dynamics consist of:
Specifications • Fixed variables
• Variables which are manipulated by a controller
You may wish to change the default operating specifications and
control scheme for a column. The default specifications and
control scheme depend on the column configuration and on
whether the simulation is flow driven or pressure driven.

Changing the Control Scheme

If you are changing the control scheme you should note the
following:

5-20 • Columns Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 When the output of a controller is disconnected, the variable to
which the output was connected is automatically fixed to maintain
the degrees of freedom.
You can only connect the input of a controller to a variable which
has been declared with the Output qualifier.
You can only connect the output of a controller to a variable which
has been declared with the Input qualifier and which is fixed. If the
variable is not fixed you should change its spec to fixed before you
can connect a control stream to it.
When you connect the output of a controller to a block or stream,
and there is more than one variable which you could connect to,
you are given a list of the possible variables.

Changing RadFrac Operating Specifications for a Flow Driven

Simulation
In a flow driven simulation, the default configuration for the
overheads system is to fix the reflux flow and manipulate the
distillate flows. See Pressure and Level Control for RadFrac for
details the default pressure and level control loops.
As an alternative you can use the following as either fixed or
manipulated variables:
RefluxRatio Reflux ratio (range 0 to infinity)
RefluxFrac Reflux flow as a fraction of total liquid flow
from reflux drum (range 0 to 1)
FlOutDrumR Required total liquid molar flow from reflux
drum
FmlOutDrumR Required total liquid mass flow from reflux
drum
By default the reflux ratio is defined as the ratio of the reflux flow
to the sum of the distillate flows including vapor, liquid, liquid1
and liquid2. You may wish to exclude the vapor flow from the
reflux ratio calculation, for example if the vapor distillate stream is
being used to model the inert gas vent from a batch still. The
parameter RRCalcOpt allows you to include or exclude the vapor
distillate in reflux ratio calculation. The default is Yes. Switch it to
No to exclude the vapor distillate flow from the reflux ratio
calculation.
The reflux ratio has a range 0 to infinity while the reflux fraction
has a range 0 to 1. Therefore reflux fraction may give better
behavior if it is manipulated by a controller.

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Columns • 5-21

 If you are fixing or manipulating the reflux ratio or reflux fraction,
you may want to use the required total mass or molar flow from
the reflux drum as the manipulated variable for the reflux drum
level controller.

Changing RadFrac Operating Specifications for a Pressure

Driven Simulation
In a pressure driven simulation, the default configuration for the
overheads system is to fix the reflux flow rate and manipulate the
distillate flows using the valve position of valves on the distillate
streams . See Pressure and Level Control for RadFrac for details
the default pressure and level control loops.
For a pressure driven simulation, rather than manipulating the
reflux ratio or reflux fraction directly you should measure the
reflux ratio or reflux fraction and use a ratio controller to
manipulate either the reflux flow or the valve position of the valve
on one of the distillate streams.
Simulating Column To simulate column startup using the RadFrac model you should
Startup first load and run your simulation normally. Ensure the simulation
is at time 0. Then run the Empty script to initialize the column to
empty. To do this, in Simulation Explorer go to Flowsheet and
click on the name for the column. In the lower pane double click
on the script Empty to run it.
The column will not truly be emptied as this would mean a
vacuum within the column. It is actually initialized to contain
nitrogen gas at 20C and 1 atm pressure. This requires that you
have a nitrogen as one of the components in your simulation before
you export it from Aspen Plus.
You should also change your simulation to fix the feed flow to the
column to zero. You may also want to make other changes to
reflect the start-up condition for your process.
Now start your dynamic simulation and apply changes to start up
the column as you would for the real plant. For convenience and
reproducibility you may want to write these in a Task.

Note:

• If you wish to model column startup you should use the simple
tray or packing hydraulics correlations (hyperlink to Selecting
the Method for Hydraulic and Pressure Drop Calculations).
The rigorous correlations are not suitable for conditions where
there is zero flow in the column.

5-22 • Columns Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 • Use the Constant Temperature or LMTD heat transfer options
(hyperlink to Specifying Heat Transfer in the Condenser and
Reboiler for RadFrac) for the condenser and reboiler. Fixing
heating and cooling duties when there is no flow in the column
does not make sense, and the simulation will not be able to
solve.

References for Perry, R.H. and Green, D., (1984), Perry’s Chemical Engineers’
RadFrac Handbook, 6th edn, pp 18-10, Eqn (18-19) and pp 18-7, Eqn (18-
3).
Stichlmair, J., Bravo, J.L., and Fair, J.R., (1989), “General Model
for Prediction of Pressure Drop and Capacity of Countercurrent
Gas/Liquid Packed Columns” In: Gas Separation and Purification,
Vol 3, pp 19-28, Eqns (14) and (15).

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Columns • 5-23

 PetroFrac in Dynamic Simulations
Dynamic PetroFrac may be used in the same applications as the
steady-state model.
In dynamic mode, PetroFrac models the pressure drop across each
stage due to the head of liquid and vapor flow resistance. Stage
hydraulics are also modeled.
To ensure consistency between the Aspen Plus and Aspen Custom
Modeler simulations, check that you have a realistic column
pressure drop in your Aspen Plus simulation. If the pressure drop
in the Aspen Plus simulation is unrealistically small, Aspen
Dynamics will not be able to generate a dynamic simulation.
Dynamic PetroFrac contains five key model elements:
• Stage
• Condenser
• Reflux drum
• Reboiler
• Furnace
• Pumparound heat exchangers
• Stripper
For all the model elements, PetroFrac assumes:
• Uni-directional flow (reverse flow is not supported)
• Perfect mixing
• All phases are in equilibrium unless a vaporization, Murphree
and/or thermal efficiency has been specified. Efficiencies are
assumed constant throughout the dynamic simulation.
The following sections describe the dynamics for each of the
model elements of PetroFrac.

PetroFrac Stage Dynamics

You can specify either simple default, or rigorous, tray or packing
correlations to model hydraulics and pressure drop.

5-24 • Columns Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 PetroFrac Condenser Dynamics
The condenser model assumes:
• Material and energy balances are instantaneous. In other
words, dynamic effects are not modeled.
• There is no entrainment between phases.

PetroFrac Reflux Drum Dynamics

• Only liquid holdup is modeled.
• The liquid reflux flow rate is specified. There is no hydraulic
equation for reflux flow.
• The flow rate of the water decant stream (if it exists) is
specified.
• The pressure is assumed to be the same as the condenser
pressure.

PetroFrac Bottoms System Dynamics

• Thermosyphon reboilers are not supported.
• Vapor and liquid holdup are modeled.
• There is no hydraulic equation for bottoms flow.

PetroFrac Stripper Dynamics

• The stage and reboiler models used in the strippers are the
same as those used for the main column.
• Perfect flow control is assumed for flows between the main
column and strippers.

PetroFrac Pumparound Dynamics

The pumparound model assumes:
• Material and energy balances are instantaneous. In other
words, dynamic effects are not modeled.
• Only liquid phase is present. This is a valid assumption
because pumparound streams are always cooled in petroleum
applications.

PetroFrac Feed Furnace Dynamics

The furnace model assumes that material and energy balances are
instantaneous. In other words, dynamic effects are not modeled.

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Columns • 5-25

 For pressure-driven flow, the pressure drop across the furnace is
related to the outlet volumetric flow rate by:
∆P = Kρ Fv2_ out

Where:
K = Constant determined by fitting to steady-state conditions
∆P = Pressure drop
ρ = Mass density at outlet conditions
Fv_out = Outlet volumetric flow rate

Pressure/Flow Effects The pressure in the top stage, whether it is a condenser or a normal
for PetroFrac tray, is always determined from the conditions on that stage, that is
the temperature and the composition.
For other stages:
• Pressure difference between stages is determined using a
pressure drop flow equation.
• Flow rates from stages are related to the liquid holdup on the
stage using a hydraulics equation.

Liquid Head for PetroFrac

The modeling of the pressure effect of liquid head is only
considered in the following areas:

The Reflux Drum

To model the effect in the Reflux drum, the parameter
LiquidHeadRF needs to be set to Yes:

Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value

LiquidHeadRF Reflux drum liquid outlet No No
pressure includes hydrostatic Yes
head
You need to specify the drum or top stage liquid outlet stream
elevation change:

Variable Description Default Value

Veshead Reflux drum liquid outlet stream 0
elevation change

5-26 • Columns Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 The Bottom Product Stage or the Reboiler
To model the effect at the bottom product stage or in the Reboiler,
the parameter LiquidHeadRB needs to be set to Yes:

Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value

LiquidHeadRB Reboiler liquid outlet pressure No No
includes hydrostatic head Yes
You need to specify the reboiler or bottom product stage liquid
outlet stream elevation change:

Variable Description Default Value

Veshead Reboiler liquid outlet 0
stream elevation change

Flow of Bottoms Product Stream

For the bottoms product stream:
• The flow rate of the stream is initially fixed at the steady-state
value. It can be manipulated manually, or by using a controller
to control the total liquid level in the reboiler or bottom stage.

Flow of Distillate Product Stream

For any distillate product stream:
• The flow rate of the stream is initially at the steady-state value.
It can be manipulated to control the liquid interface level in the
reflux drum or top stage.

Flow of Water Decant Stream

For any water decant stream:
• The flow rate of the water decant stream is initially at the
steady-state value. It can be manipulated to control the water
level in the reflux drum, sump or intermediate stage.

Flow of Vapor Distillate Stream or Total Vapor Draw

For any vapor distillate stream, or total vapor draw from a stage:
• The flow rate of the stream is initially fixed at the steady-state
value. It can be manipulated manually, or by using a controller
to control the pressure in the stage from which the stream
comes.

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Columns • 5-27

 Flow for Pumparounds in a Column
For any pumparounds in a column:
• The pressure drop in the pumparound is fixed at the steady-
state value.
• The pumparound is instantaneous, that is, it does not have any
dynamics. The flow rate of the outlet stream from the
pumparound is determined by the material balance.
• The flow rate of the inlet stream to the pumparound is as
specified on the PetroFrac Pumparound form.

Pressure and Level Pressure and level controllers are automatically added to the
Control for PetroFrac flowsheet when appropriate.
For flow-driven simulations:

Controller When Measured Manipulated

Added Variable Variable
Pressure If there is a vapor distillate Main column top stage pressure Vapor distillate mass
product stream flow rate
Pressure If there is no vapor distillate Main column top stage/condenser Condenser heat duty,
product stream pressure or cooling medium
temperature, or cooling
medium flow rate
Level If there is a reflux drum and a Reflux drum liquid level Liquid distillate mass
liquid distillate product stream flow rate
Level If there is a reflux drum and no Reflux drum liquid level Liquid reflux mass
liquid distillate product stream flow rate
Level If there is a reflux drum and a Reflux drum water level Water decant mass
water decant stream flow rate
Level Always Main column sump liquid level Main column bottoms
liquid mass flow rate
Pressure If there are one or more strippers Stripper top stage pressure Stripper overhead
return mass flow rate
Level If there are one or more strippers Stripper sump liquid level Stripper bottoms liquid
mass flow rate

5-28 • Columns Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 For pressure-driven simulations:
Checks are made during the export from Aspen Plus to see if there
is a valve on each outlet stream of the PetroFrac block. If a valve is
present in the current hierarchy, then the controller will manipulate
the valve position.

Controller When Measured Manipulated

Added Variable Variable
Pressure If there is a vapor distillate Main column top stage pressure Valve position for the valve
product stream on the vapor distillate
stream
Pressure If there is no vapor distillate Main column top stage/condenser Condenser heat duty, or
product stream pressure cooling medium
temperature, or cooling
medium flow rate
Level If there is a reflux drum and a Reflux drum liquid level Valve position for the valve
liquid distillate product on the liquid distillate
stream stream
Level If there is a reflux drum and a Reflux drum water level Valve position for the valve
water decant stream on the water decant stream
Level Always Main column sump liquid level Valve position for the valve
on the bottoms stream
Pressure If there are one or more Stripper top stage pressure Stripper overhead return
strippers mass flow rate
Level If strippers are present Stripper sump liquid level Valve position for the valve
on the bottoms stream
If no valve is present in the current hierarchy, then the controller
output is not connected and you should connect the controller
output (OP) to an appropriate manipulated variable elsewhere in
the flowsheet.
Automatically adding controllers is normally sufficient to ensure
that the dynamic simulation runs at steady state until a disturbance
is introduced. For some processes, you may need to add
temperature controllers to ensure that the dynamic simulation runs
at steady state, particularly if you are using the Constant Duty
option to model heat transfer in a block.
The following diagrams show how these rules apply in practice.
The first diagram shows an inventory control arrangement for the
overheads of a column with a liquid distillate product only.
Pressure is controlled by manipulating the duty, coolant
temperature, or coolant flow rate of the condenser. The level in the
reflux drum is controlled by manipulating the liquid distillate flow
rate.

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Columns • 5-29

 PC

Reflux Drum

LC

Reflux Liquid Distillate

Typical overhead inventory control configuration for a column with no vapor

distillate product

5-30 • Columns Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 The second diagram shows an inventory control arrangement for
the overheads of a column with both liquid and vapor distillate
products. Here, pressure is controlled by manipulating the vapor
flow rate from the reflux drum. The level in the reflux drum is
controlled by manipulating the liquid distillate flow rate.
PC Vapor Distillate

Reflux Drum

LC

Reflux Liquid Distillate

Typical overhead inventory control configuration for a column with a vapor

distillate product

The following diagram shows the inventory control arrangement

for the sump and reboiler of a column. The liquid level in the sump
is always controlled by manipulating the bottoms product flow
rate.

LC

Bottoms
Default sump inventory control configuration

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Columns • 5-31

 Specifying PetroFrac A Relief port is available to allow simulation of relief scenarios.
for Pressure Relief

Specifying PetroFrac To specify the overall heat transfer coefficient (U) for the
Overall Heat Transfer condenser
Coefficient • Open the Configure form for the relevant submodel of the
instance of the PetroFrac model on the flowsheet.
The overall heat transfer coefficient can be calculated by these
different methods:
• Constant
• Power law relationship based on process-side
• Power law relationship based on heating/cooling medium-side
• Film coefficient method
The method used is controlled by the HTCOpt parameter.

Constant Method
U is fixed and may be changed directly by the user

Power Law Relationship Based on One Side of the Exchanger

U is based on the following relationship:
u exp
 Flow 
U = U _ ref . 
 Flow _ ref 

Where:
U_ref is Reference overall heat transfer coefficient
(value fixed by user)
Flow is Actual flowrate
Flow_ref is Reference flowrate (value fixed by user)
Uexp is exponent (value fixed by user)
For the process side the flow can be either on a molar or mass
basis determined by the state of the HTCBasis parameter. The
medium side is always be on a mass basis.

5-32 • Columns Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 Film Coefficient Method
D 
Do .1n  o 
1 1 D 1  Di 
= + o . +
U h SHELL D i hTUBE 2. Kw

Where:
h is Film heat transfer coefficient
D is Diameter
KW is Tube metal thermal conductivity
Subscripts:
SHELL : Shell-side
TUBE : Tube-side
o : Outer tube
i : Inner tube
and
u exp
 Flow 
h = h _ ref .  
 Flow _ ref 

for both shell and tube sides

Note For constant h, specify h_ref = h, uexp = 0 and
Flow_ref = 1.
The film coefficients are defined for the process and medium side
rather than shell and tube. For the condenser you need to specify if
the process side is on the shell or tube via the CalcType parameter.
The film coefficient method is not available if CalcType is defined
as shortcut.

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Columns • 5-33

 Specifying PetroFrac Use the PetroFrac Dynamic form to add the specifications for
for Dynamic dynamic simulations:
Simulations
On this sheet Specify
Condenser and Reboiler The heat transfer in the condenser and the
reboiler
Sump The column sump geometry
The initial liquid volume fraction in the sump

Reflux Drum The reflux drum geometry

The initial liquid volume fraction in the reflux
drum

Hydraulics The hydraulics method to be used

The tray or packing geometry for all stages in
the column

For PetroFrac, you can choose to model equipment heat capacity

and heat transfer with the environment for the Reflux Drum, Sump
and Stages.

5-34 • Columns Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 Specifying Heat Transfer in the Condenser and Reboiler for
PetroFrac
If the column has a condenser or a reboiler, you can enter details of
the heat exchangers. To model heat transfer, choose one of the
following options and specify the appropriate additional input:

If you choose Specify Description

Constant duty (default) No additional input Duty is specified. It is initially equal
to the steady-state value but you can
manipulate it during the simulation
either manually or by using a
controller. A useful approximation
for many situations.
Constant temperature Medium temperature Corresponds to the case where you
have a condensing or boiling fluid
exchanging its latent heat.
LMTD Inlet temperature of the Corresponds to the case where you
medium have a fluid whose temperature
Heat capacity of the medium changes as it exchanges sensible
heat. Initial medium flow rate is
Initial closest temperature
automatically calculated, but you
approach between medium
can manipulate it during the
and process fluid
simulation either manually or by
using a controller.
Dynamic Inlet temperature of the Corresponds to the case when you
medium. have a well-mixed heating/cooling
Heat capacity of the jacket.
medium
Initial closest temperature
approach between medium
and process fluid
Mass holdup of the medium

Specifying the Sump for PetroFrac

You can specify the geometry (head type and size) of the column
sump.
Choose one of these head types:
• 2:1 elliptical (default)
• Hemispherical
• Flat plate
Specify the column sump size:

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Columns • 5-35

 If the heads are Specify this and internal diameter
Elliptical Tangent to tangent height
Hemispherical Tangent to tangent height
Flat plate Internal height

The modeling approach lumps the reboiler volume with the sump
volume. You should allow for this when entering the sump size.
For more information about vessel geometry, see the Aspen
Dynamics User Guide, Chapter 1.
If a liquid phase is present, specify the initial liquid volume
fraction in the column sump. The default value is 0.5.

Specifying the Reflux Drum for PetroFrac

If the column has a condenser and, therefore, a reflux drum, you
can specify the geometry (orientation, head type, and size) of the
drum.
Choose one of these drum types:
• A vertical drum (default)
• A horizontal drum
Choose one of these head types:
• 2:1 elliptical (default)
• Hemispherical
• Flat plate
Specify the drum size:

If the heads are Specify this and internal diameter

Elliptical Tangent to tangent length
Hemispherical Tangent to tangent length
Flat plate Internal length

For more information about vessel geometry, see the Aspen

Dynamics User Guide, Chapter 1.
If a reflux drum is present, specify the initial liquid volume
fraction in it. The initial liquid volume fraction is the volume of
liquid in the reflux drum at the start of the simulation, divided by
the total volume of the reflux drum. The default value is 0.5.

Specifying the Hydraulics for PetroFrac

Use one of these methods to model the hydraulics and pressure
drop within a stage:

5-36 • Columns Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 • Simple default tray or packing correlations
• The rigorous tray or packing correlations provided in Aspen
Plus®
For details of the equations used, see Column Hydraulic and
Pressure Drop Equations.
When you have a PetroFrac block in a dynamic simulation that
uses rigorous hydraulics, you must always use the matching appdf
file. This is because, when using the rigorous tray or packing
correlations provided in Aspen Plus (TPSAR), Aspen Dynamics
uses the same subroutines as in Aspen Plus. The data structure
for this is defined in the appdf file, which is exported at the same
time as the dynamic simulation.

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Columns • 5-37

 Selecting the Method for Hydraulic and Pressure Drop
Calculations
This table gives information about the types of correlations you
can use:

To Use in a Dynamic Run Then

Rigorous tray and packing correlations For all stages in the steady-state run, you must have:
• Carried out a single tray rating or packing rating
calculation
• Set the pressure update flag to YES
In addition, on the Hydraulics sheet, ensure the hydraulics
method is set to Rigorous.
Simple tray or packing correlations Even if the rigorous correlations are used in the steady-
state run, set the hydraulics method on the Hydraulics
sheet, to Simple-Tray or Simple-Packing respectively.
If you did not use rigorous correlations for the steady-state
simulation, you will only be able to use the simple tray
correlations.
If you specify simple tray correlations, then for all stages
in the column except the condenser and the bottom
stage/reboiler, you must specify:
• Diameter of tray section
• Spacing between trays (used to calculate tray volume
and surface area)
• Weir height
• Ratio of weir length to column diameter
• Active area as a percentage of tray area
If you specify simple packing correlations, then for all
stages in the column except the condenser and the bottom
stage/reboiler, you must specify:
• Diameter of packed section
• Height equivalent to a theoretical plate
• Initial liquid volume fraction in the packed section,
that is the volume of liquid present, divided by the
volume of the section

5-38 • Columns Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 For PetroFrac you can choose to model equipment heat capacity
and heat transfer with the environment for the Reflux Drum, Sump
and Stages:

For If you choose You must enter

to model
Reflux Drum Equipment Heat Capacity The specific heat capacity and the
mass of vessel
Reflux Drum Heat Transfer with the Environment The overall heat transfer
coefficient
The ambient temperature on the
Setup Specifications Global sheet
Sump Equipment Heat Capacity The specific heat capacity
The mass of vessel
Sump Heat Transfer with the Environment The overall heat transfer
coefficient
The ambient temperature on the
Setup Specifications Global sheet
Stages Equipment Heat Capacity The specific heat capacity
The mass of each column section
Stages Heat Transfer with the Environment The overall heat transfer
coefficient
The ambient temperature on the
Setup Specifications Global sheet
References for Perry, R.H. and Green, D., (1984), Perry’s Chemical Engineers’
PetroFrac Handbook, 6th edn, pp 18-10, Eqn (18-19) and pp 18-7, Eqn (18-
3).
Stichlmair, J., Bravo, J.L., and Fair, J.R., (1989), “General Model for Prediction
of Pressure Drop and Capacity of Countercurrent Gas/Liquid Packed Columns”
In: Gas Separation and Purification, Vol 3, pp 19-28, Eqns (14) and (15).

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Columns • 5-39

 Column Hydraulic and Pressure Drop
Equations
Use one of these methods to model the hydraulics and pressure
drop within a stage:
• Simple tray or packing correlations
• The rigorous tray or packing correlations provided in Aspen
Plus
This section gives details of the correlations that are used.

Overall Tray Efficiency in Radfrac Simple Tray Hydraulics

The overall efficiency specified on the
Radfrac/Dynamics/Hydraulics sheet is a correction factor (between
0 and 1) used to ensure that the correct holdup is modeled during a
dynamic simulation of Radfrac. For example, consider a real
column having 100 trays, for which the overall efficiency is known
to be 70%. For a steady state simulation, such a column can be
modeled using a RADFRAC with 70 stages (
Murphree/vaporization efficiency of 1). However, in a dynamic
simulation, the holdup should correspond to a 100-tray column.
This is accomplished by correcting the holdup in the “theoretical”
stage using the overall efficiency. Since 70 “theoretical” trays are
used to model 100 “real” trays, the following relation can be used:
Holdup in a theoretical stage = Holdup in real tray/Overall
efficiency
Liquid level in a theoretical stage = Liquid level in a real
tray/Overall efficiency
The following assumptions are made while using overall
efficiency:
• The number of “theoretical” stages has been specified.
• The actual tray diameter, tray spacing, weir height have been
specified on the Radfrac/Dynamics/Hydraulics sheet
• The “actual” pressure drop for the column has been specified
Note that when initializing the column in a dynamic simulation
from the steady state results, the actual tray diameter, tray spacing,
weir height and the steady state liquid flow results are used to
calculate the crest height and level on the tray (level_tray) via the
Francis weir equation. These are the "actual" rather than
theoretical values since they are based on actual tray dimensions.

5-40 • Columns Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 Column Simple Tray Hydraulics Equation
The simple tray hydraulics equation relates the liquid flow rate
from a tray to the amount of liquid on the tray. The Francis weir
equation for a single pass tray is used:
QL = KWeir LWeir hCrest
1.5

Where:
QL = Volumetric liquid flow rate from the stage
KWeir = Weir constant
The value used for the weir constant is the same as that used in the
rigorous tray rating methods.
LWeir = Total weir length
hCrest = Height of the liquid crest over the weir
The total weir length is specified using the ratio of weir length to
column diameter. The default for this ratio is 0.7267.
The liquid crest is the difference between the height of liquid on
the tray and the weir height. The height of liquid is the ratio of the
volume of liquid to the active area of the tray. In turn, the active
area of the tray is specified as a percentage of the tray area. The
default value for this percentage is 90%.
• To simulate a single pass tray, use the default ratio of weir
length to column diameter (that is, 0.7267), and the default
value of active area as a percentage of the tray area (that is,
90%).
• To simulate two, three or four pass trays, adjust these two
default values.

Column Simple Tray Pressure Drop Flow Equation

If you specify simple tray correlations, the pressure drop across a
tray is related to the volumetric flow of vapor into the tray and the
liquid on the tray using the following equation:
∆P = KO ρV QV2 + ρL gc hL
Where:
∆P = Pressure drop across the tray
KO = Orifice constant
ρV = Vapor molar density
ρL = Liquid molar density
QV = Volumetric flow rate of vapor to the tray

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Columns • 5-41

 gC = Gravitational constant
hL = Liquid level on the tray
The orifice constant, KO , for each tray is fitted so that the initial
pressure drop during the dynamic simulation matches that from the
steady-state simulation.
Important Make sure that the pressure drop profile you specify
for the steady-state simulation is consistent with the real pressure
profile in the column. The specified total pressure drop must be
large enough to account for the pressure drop due to the head of
liquid, ∆PL . A typical value of ∆PL is 0.01 bar (approx. 0.1 psi).
∆PL will rarely exceed twice this value.

Column Simple Packing Hydraulics Equation

The simple packing hydraulics equation relates the liquid flow rate
from a packed section to the amount of liquid in the section as
follows:
l fV = KPack u L
Where:
l fV = Liquid volume fraction in the packed section
uL = Liquid velocity in the packed section
This is calculated from the volumetric flow rate of liquid and the
total cross-sectional area of the section.
KPack = Packing constant
This constant is fitted from the initial volume fraction that you
specify and the liquid velocity calculated from the steady-state
results.

Column Simple Packing Pressure Drop Flow Equation

If you specify simple packing correlations, the pressure drop per
theoretical stage is related to the volumetric flow of vapor into the
packed section using the following equation:
∆P = KO ρV QV2

Where:
∆P = Pressure drop per theoretical stage
KO = Orifice constant
ρV = Vapor molar density
QV = Volumetric flow rate of vapor to the packed section

5-42 • Columns Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 The orifice constant, K O , for each theoretical stage is fitted so that
the initial pressure drop during the dynamic simulation matches
that from the steady-state simulation.
Important Make sure that the pressure drop profile you specify
for the steady-state simulation is consistent with the real pressure
profile in the column. Typically, the pressure drop per theoretical
stage in a packed column is not less than 0.001 bar (approx. 0.01
psi).

Column Rigorous Tray Rating Calculations

If you specify rigorous tray rating calculations, the pressure drop
across the tray is calculated by the same rigorous methods used for
the steady-state simulation. For more information on specifying
rigorous tray rating calculations, see Specifying the Hydraulics for
RadFrac and Specifying the Hydraulics for PetroFrac. The Francis
weir equation is used to model the hydraulics. The number of
passes and tray geometry specified for the steady-state simulation
will be used.
Downcomer holdup is also accounted for.
The liquid head loss in the downcomer, hdc, is given by the
following equation (Perry, 1984):
2
Q 
hdc = Kdc  L 
 Ada 

Where:
K dc = A constant
QL = Volumetric flow rate of liquid from the tray for that
pass
Ada = Minimum area under the downcomer apron
The values of the constant, K dc , and the minimum area under the
downcomer apron, Ada , are the same as those used in the rigorous
tray rating calculations in the steady-state simulation.
The downcomer backup is given by the following equation (Perry,
1984):
hb = hWeir + hCrest + htot + hdc

Where:
hWeir = Height of the weir
hCrest = Liquid crest over the weir
htot = Total liquid head loss across the tray

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Columns • 5-43

 For references on the tray rating methods used, see Aspen Plus
Unit Operation Models.

Column Rigorous Packing Calculations

If you specify rigorous packing rating or packing sizing
calculations, the pressure drop across the section is calculated by
the same rigorous methods as used for the steady-state simulation.
For more information on rigorous packing rating or packing sizing
calculations, see Specifying the Hydraulics for RadFrac and
Specifying the Hydraulics for PetroFrac. The packed section
hydraulics are modeled using a method available in the open
literature (Stichlmair et al., 1989).
The fractional volumetric holdup in a packed section, VL/V, is
given by the following equation:
1
VL  u 2a  3   ∆P  
= KBL  L4.65  1 + 20 
V  gε    ZρL g  

Where:
K BL = A dimensionless constant, equal to 0.555.
uL = Superficial liquid velocity
a = Specific surface area of the packing
g = Acceleration due to gravity
ε = Packing voidage
∆P = Pressure drop across the section
Z = Height of packing in the section
ρL = Liquid density
The specific surface area, a, the packing voidage, ε, and the height
of packing in the section, Z, are all obtained from the steady-state
tray and packing calculations.

Column Draining Calculations

Draining, the flow of liquid through tray perforations, is included
in the tray models. This allows trays with weirs to drain when the
column is shut down. Bubble cap and valve trays generally have
weep holes added for drainage.
The following equation is used to represent draining:
Fl Drain = C DrainRate ∆PStatic (1 - Fv Ratio )

Where:
Fl Drain = Draining liquid molar flow rate

5-44 • Columns Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 C DrainRate = Drain rate coefficient. This is determined so that the
drainage time of a tray is 10 minutes.
∆PStatic = Static liquid head
Fv Ratio = Vapor flow ratio. This is clipped between 0 and 1.
Restricting Fv Ratio between 0 and 1 means that draining starts if
the vapor flow is less than 10% of the nominal vapor flowrate.
Otherwise, there is no draining.

The vapor flow rate ratio is calculated using:

Fv
Fv Ratio =
Fv Norm C DrainPoint

Where:
Fv = Vapor flow rate through orifices
Fv Norm = Normal (steady-state) vapor flow rate
through orifices
C DrainPoint = Drain point coefficient, set to 0.1
The two coefficients may be adjusted in the tray model to fit the
draining behavior of real trays.

Modeling Redistributors in RadFrac

Redistributors are used in packed columns where feeds are
introduced and between packed sections whenever liquid
redistribution is required.
When you use rigorous hydraulics in RadFrac or PetroFrac to
model a packed column, you can model a redistributor using a tray
model placed between packed sections in the column. This
technique may be useful for orifice or weir redistributors when you
want to capture the effect of the holdup on column dynamics. It
also allows you to represent the pressure drop caused by the
redistributor.
You may need to reduce the efficiency on the redistributor tray to
accurately represent the behavior of your column.

Modeling Redistributors in PetroFrac

Redistributors are used in packed columns where feeds are
introduced and between packed sections whenever liquid
redistribution is required.
When you use rigorous hydraulics in PetroFrac or RadFrac to
model a packed column, you can model a redistributor using a tray
model placed between packed sections in the column. This

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Columns • 5-45

 technique may be useful for orifice or weir redistributors when you
want to capture the effect of the holdup on column dynamics. It
also allows you to represent the pressure drop caused by the
redistributor.
You may need to reduce the efficiency on the redistributor tray to
accurately represent the behavior of your column.

RadFrac Hydraulics and Reactions

If you specify reaction on a stage in the steady-state run, you must
enter a holdup or residence time for that stage. Since the actual
holdup used for hydraulics is not calculated in the steady-state run,
the holdup that is used for calculating the reaction rate is likely to
be different from the actual holdup. The dynamic model calculates
the reaction holdup as a fixed ratio of the actual holdup. When
these holdups are inconsistent, a warning appears along with the
values of the reaction and actual holdups.
See the start of Chapter 6 for a description of the Power Law
equations.
Note LHHW kinetics are not applicable to reactive distillation systems, so this
option is not available.

5-46 • Columns Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

6 Reactors

This chapter first describes the reaction kinetics that are available
in Aspen Dynamics for rate-based reactions.
It then describes the following unit operation models for reactors:
• RStoic
• RYield
• RGibbs
• RCSTR
• RPlug

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Reactors • 6-1

 Reaction Kinetics of Rate-Based
Reactions
You can represent the reaction kinetics of rate-based reactions in
the following ways:
• Power Law kinetic model
• Langmuir-Hinshelwood-Hougen-Watson (LHHW) kinetic
model
(not applicable to reactive distillation systems)
• User-defined kinetic model
Power Law Kinetic Power Law reaction kinetics are available in these models::
Model • RCSTR and RPlug - reaction models that are described in this
chapter
• RadFrac - a column model that is described in Chapter 5
• KineticsEst - a kinetic estimation model that is described in
Chapter 6 of the User Guide
The general form of the Power Law expression is:
αi
With TO unspecified: r = kT n e − E / RT ∏ (C )
i
n
T  − E / R[1 / T −1 / TO ] αi
With TO specified: r = k   e ∏ (Ci )
 TO 
Where
r = Rate of reaction
k = Pre-exponential factor
T = Temperature (K)
TO = Reference temperature (K)
n = Temperature constant
E = Activation energy
R = Universal gas law constant
C = Component concentration (see the table, later)
i = Component index

6-2 • Reactors Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 The actual Power Law expression depends on your choice of
concentration basis:
Concentration Basis Concentration Term C
Molarity (default) Component molar concentration (kg
mole/m3)
Molality Component molality (g mole/kg H2O)
Mole Fraction Component mole fraction
Mass Fraction Component mass fraction
Partial Pressure Component partial pressure (N/m2)
Mass Concentration Component mass concentration
(kg/m3)
The units of the reaction rate and the pre-exponential factor depend
on:
• Order of the reaction
• Concentration basis
Langmuir- LHHW reaction kinetics are available in these models:
Hinshelwood- • RCSTR and RPlug - reaction models that are described in this
Hougen-Watson chapter
(LHHW) Kinetic Model
• KineticsEst - a kinetic estimation model that is described in
Chapter 6 of the User Guide
For rate-controlled reactions, the LHHW rate expression can be
written as:
kinetic factor × driving force expression
r=
adsorption expression
The table gives the individual elements for this equation:
Equation Element Expression
Kinetic factor T
n
 − E / R[1 / T −1 / TO ]
k   e with TO specified
 TO 
kT n e − E / RT with TO unspecified
Driving force expression K1 ∏ C i i − K 2 ∏ C j j
ν ν

Adsorption expression
(∑ K ∏ C )i
νj m
j

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Reactors • 6-3

 Where:
r = Rate of reaction
k = Pre-exponential factor
T = Temperature (K)
TO = Reference temperature (K)
n = Temperature constant
E = Activation energy
R = Universal gas law constant
C = Component concentration
m = Adsorption expression exponent
K1 , K 2 , K i = Equilibrium constants
ν = concentration exponent
i,j = Component indices
The concentration terms C i and C j depend on your choice of
concentration basis:
Concentration Basis Concentration Term C
Molarity (default) Component molar concentration (kg
mole/m3)
Molality Component molality (g mole/kg H2O)
Mole Fraction Component mole fraction
Mass Fraction Component mass fraction
Partial Pressure Component partial pressure (N/m2)
Mass Concentration Component mass concentration (kg/m3)
You specify adsorption constants by entering the term number and
specifying the coefficients:
Bi
ln( K i ) = Ai + + C i ln(T ) + Di T
T
Where:
Ki = Equilibrium constant
T = Temperature (K)
Ai , Bi , C i , Di = User-supplied constants

6-4 • Reactors Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 RStoic in Dynamic Simulations
RStoic is a relatively simple model that enables you to model a
reaction by specifying reaction stoichiometry and extent. It does
not support reverse flow. To model the dynamics of the RStoic
reactor, you must specify the reactor geometry. Three options are
provided:

Option Description
Stirred tank (CSTR) Perfect mixing is assumed.
The reaction equations are applied at the outlet conditions of the
reactor, so that the reactor outlet always satisfies the reaction
specification.
You can use a vertical or horizontal vessel. Liquid and vapor holdup
in the vessel are modeled and the liquid level can vary during a
dynamic run. You can also choose the heating and cooling methods.
The reactions are instantaneous.
Tubular or plug flow The reaction equations are applied at the outlet conditions of the
reactor (PFR) reactor, so that the reactor outlet always satisfies the reaction
specification.
The reactions are instantaneous.
Instantaneous No dynamic effects are modeled.

To model a rigorous stirred tank reactor, use the RCSTR model.

To model a rigorous plug flow reactor, use the RPlug model.
RStoic does not support:
• The Aspen Plus Generate Combustion Reactions option
• The Aspen Plus Calculate Heat of Reaction option
• The Aspen Plus Specify User Heat of Reaction option
• Free-water calculations

Pressure/Flow Effects for RStoic

The pressure/flow effects depend upon the reactor geometry that
you choose.
For instantaneous:
• The pressure in the vessel is fixed at the steady-state value.
• The outlet flow rate is determined by the material balance.
For CSTR where a vapor phase is present:
• The pressure at any point in time is determined by the
conditions in the vessel, that is, the temperature and the
component holdups.

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Reactors • 6-5

 • The outlet vapor flow rate is initially set at the steady-state
value but can be manipulated to control the pressure.
For CSTR where only liquid phases are present:
• The pressure in the reactor is fixed at the steady-state value.
• The outlet flow rate is initially fixed at the steady-state value
but can be manipulated to control the liquid level.
For PFR:
• The pressure change through the reactor is fixed to the steady-
state value.
• The outlet flow rate is determined by material balance.

Pressure and Level Control for RStoic

Note If the PFR or instantaneous options are selected, no
controllers are automatically added.
For CSTR geometry, pressure and level controllers are
automatically added to the flowsheet when appropriate:
Controller When Measured Manipulated
added variable variable
Pressure Vapor holdup is modeled Pressure in vessel Required vapor outlet
molar flow rate
Level Liquid holdup is modeled Liquid level Required liquid outlet
mass flow rate
For pressure-driven simulations:
Checks are made during the export from Aspen Plus to see if there
is a valve on the outlet stream of the RStoic block. If a valve is
present in the current hierarchy, then the controller will manipulate
the valve position
Controller When Measured Manipulated
added variable variable
Pressure Vapor-only option is used Pressure in vessel Valve position for the
valve on the outlet stream
Level Liquid-only option is used Liquid level Valve position for the
valve on the outlet stream
If no valve is present in the current hierarchy, then the controller
output is not connected and you should connect the controller
output (OP) to an appropriate manipulated variable elsewhere in
the flowsheet.
This is normally sufficient to ensure that the dynamic simulation
runs at steady state until a disturbance is introduced. For some
processes you may need to add temperature controllers to ensure

6-6 • Reactors Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 that the dynamic simulation runs at steady state, particularly if you
are using the Constant Duty option to model heat transfer in a
block.
Specifying RStoic for Use the RStoic Dynamic form to add the specifications for
Dynamic Simulations dynamic simulations:
If you choose this geometry type Specify
Instantaneous reactor (default) No other specifications in addition
to those given for steady-state
simulation
CSTR Reactor geometry
PFR Reactor geometry

Specifying the Reactor Geometry for RStoic

CSTR Geometry
For CSTR geometry, specify the vessel type and dimensions.
Choose from:
• A vertical vessel (default)
• A horizontal vessel
Choose one of these head types:
If you choose this Specify this and
head type internal diameter
2:1 Elliptical (default) Tangent to tangent length
Hemispherical Tangent to tangent length
Flat plate Internal length

PFR Geometry

For PFR geometry, specify the length and internal diameter of the
reactor.
For more information about vessel geometry, see the Aspen
Dynamics User Guide, Chapter 1.

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Reactors • 6-7

 Specifying the Initial Liquid Volume Fraction for RStoic
For CSTR geometry with a single liquid phase, specify the initial
liquid volume fraction. This is the volume of liquid in the vessel at
the start of the simulation divided by the total volume of the
vessel. The default value is 0.5.
If the steady-state simulation Then the vessel will initially be
calculates a vapor fraction of
Zero Full of liquid
One Empty

Specifying CSTR Heat Transfer for RStoic in Dynamic

Simulations
Three methods of modeling heating or cooling within the reactor
are available. Choose one of the following heat transfer calculation
methods:
If you choose Specify Description
Constant duty (default) No additional input Duty is specified. It is initially equal
to the steady-state value but you can
manipulate it during the simulation
either manually or by using a
controller. Constant duty is a useful
approximation for many situations.
Constant temperature Medium temperature Corresponds to the case where you
have a condensing or boiling fluid
exchanging its latent heat
LMTD • Inlet temperature of the medium Corresponds to the case where you
• Heat capacity of the medium have a fluid whose temperature
changes as it exchanges sensible
• Initial closest temperature heat. Initial medium flow rate is
approach between medium and automatically calculated, but you
process fluid can manipulate it during the
simulation either manually or by
using a controller.

6-8 • Reactors Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 RYield in Dynamic Simulations
RYield is a relatively simple model that enables you to model a
reaction by specifying reaction yield. It does not support reverse
flow. To model the dynamics of the RYield reactor, you must
specify the reactor geometry. Three options are provided:
• Stirred tank (CSTR). Perfect mixing is assumed.
• Tubular or plug flow reactor (PFR).
• Instantaneous.
For the CSTR and PFR geometry, the reaction equations are
applied at the outlet conditions of the reactor, so that the reactor
outlet always satisfies the reaction specification.
For the CSTR option, you can use a vertical or horizontal vessel.
Liquid and vapor hold up in the vessel are modeled and the liquid
level can vary during dynamic run. You can also choose the
heating and cooling methods.

Pressure/Flow Effects for RYield

The pressure/flow depends upon the reactor geometry that you
choose.
For instantaneous:
• The pressure in the reactor is fixed at the steady-state value.
• The outlet flow rate is determined by the material balance.
For CSTR where a vapor phase is present:
• The pressure at any point in time is determined by the
conditions in the vessel, that is, the temperature and the
component holdups.
• The outlet vapor flow rate is initially set at the steady-state
value but can be manipulated to control the pressure.
For CSTR where only liquid phases are present:
• The pressure in the reactor is fixed at the steady-state value.
• The outlet flow rate is initially fixed at the steady-state value
but can be manipulated to control the liquid level.
For PFR:
• The pressure change through the reactor is fixed to the steady-
state value.
• The outlet flow rate is determined by material balance.

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Reactors • 6-9

 Pressure and Level Control for RYield
Note If the PFR or instantaneous options are selected, no
controllers are automatically added.
For CSTR geometry, pressure and level controllers are
automatically added to the flowsheet when appropriate.
For flow-driven simulations:
Controller When Measured Manipulated
added variable variable
Pressure Vapor holdup is modeled Pressure in vessel Vapor outlet molar flow rate
Level Liquid holdup is modeled Liquid level Liquid outlet mass flow rate
For pressure-driven simulations:
Checks are made during the export from Aspen Plus to see if there
is a valve on the outlet stream of the RYield block. If a valve is
present in the current hierarchy, then the controller will manipulate
the valve position.
Controller When Measured Manipulated
added variable variable
Pressure Vapor-only option is used Pressure in vessel Valve position for the valve
on the outlet stream
Level Liquid-only option is used Liquid level Valve position for the valve
on the outlet stream
If no valve is present in the current hierarchy, then the controller
output is not connected and you should connect the controller
output (OP) to an appropriate manipulated variable elsewhere in
the flowsheet.
This is normally sufficient to ensure that the dynamic simulation
runs at steady state until a disturbance is introduced. For some
processes you may need to add temperature controllers to ensure
that the dynamic simulation runs at steady state, particularly if you
are using the Constant Duty option to model heat transfer in a
block.
If the PFR or instantaneous options are selected, no controllers are
automatically added.
Specifying RYield for Use the RYield Dynamic form to add the specifications for
Dynamic Simulations dynamic simulations.
This table shows the geometry types you can choose:
If you choose this geometry type Specify
Instantaneous reactor (default) No other specifications in
addition to those given for
steady-state simulation

6-10 • Reactors Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 CSTR Reactor geometry
PFR Reactor geometry

Specifying the Reactor Geometry for RYield

CSTR Geometry
For CSTR geometry, specify the vessel type and dimensions.
Choose one of these vessel types:
• A vertical vessel (default)
• A horizontal vessel
Choose one of the head types shown in this table:
If you choose this head type Specify this and internal diameter
2:1 Elliptical (default) Tangent to tangent length
Hemispherical Tangent to tangent length
Flat plate Internal length
PFR Geometry

For PFR geometry, specify the length and internal diameter of the
reactor.
For more information about vessel geometry, see the Aspen
Dynamics User Guide, Chapter 1.

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Reactors • 6-11

 Specifying the Initial Liquid Volume Fraction for RYield
For CSTR geometry with a single liquid phase, specify the initial
liquid volume fraction. This is the volume of liquid in the vessel at
the start of the simulation divided by the total volume of the
vessel. The default value is 0.5.
If the steady-state simulation Then the vessel will initially be
calculates a vapor fraction of
Zero Full of liquid
One Empty

Specifying CSTR Heat Transfer for RYield in Dynamic

Simulations
Three methods of modeling heating or cooling within the reactor
are available.
Choose one of these heat transfer calculation methods:
If you choose Specify Description
Constant duty (default) No additional input Duty is specified. It is initially equal to
the steady-state value but you can
manipulate it during the simulation either
manually or by using a controller.
Constant duty is a useful approximation
for many situations.
Constant temperature Medium temperature Corresponds to the case where you have
a condensing or boiling fluid exchanging
its latent heat
LMTD • Inlet temperature of the medium Corresponds to the case where you have
• Heat capacity of the medium a fluid whose temperature changes as it
exchanges sensible heat. Initial medium
• Initial closest temperature flow rate is automatically calculated, but
approach between medium and you can manipulate it during the
process fluid simulation either manually or by using a
controller.

6-12 • Reactors Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 RGibbs in Dynamic Simulations
RGibbs enables you to model:
• Single-phase chemical equilibrium
• Simultaneous phase and chemical equilibrium
• Phase equilibrium without chemical reactions, particularly
where there are multiple liquid phases
RGibbs does not support reverse flow.
If you are using the RGibbs Products sheet to specify components
present as products, ensure that the number of components are the
same as the numbers present at the inlet stream to RGibbs.
To model the dynamics of the RGibbs reactor, you must specify
the reactor geometry. Three options are provided:
• Stirred tank (CSTR). Perfect mixing is assumed.
• Tubular or plug flow reactor (PFR).
• Instantaneous. No dynamic effects are modeled.
For CSTR, you can use a vertical or horizontal vessel. Liquid and
vapor holdup in the vessel are modeled and the liquid level can
vary during a dynamic run. You can also choose the heating and
cooling methods.
When you have an RGibbs block in your dynamic simulation, you
must always use the matching .appdf file. This is because the
Aspen Dynamics RGibbs model uses the same Gibbs Free Energy
minimization subroutine as Aspen Plus. The input data for this is
defined in the .appdf file, which is exported at the same time as the
dynamic simulation.
The reactor inlet conditions, pressure and duty can be changed
within Aspen Dynamics. Other configuration parameters are fixed
to the values specified in Aspen Plus, and can only be changed
within Aspen Plus.
If you specify inert components on the inerts tab of the Aspen Plus
Setup form for the RGibbs block, specify fractions instead of mole
flows for the amount of inert components in the outlet streams.
This ensures the solution remains feasible if the inlet flow rate
drops during the dynamic simulation.

Pressure/Flow Effects for RGibbs

The pressure/flow depends upon the reactor geometry that you
choose.

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Reactors • 6-13

 For instantaneous:
• The pressure in the reactor is fixed at the steady-state value.
• The outlet flow rate is determined by the material balance.
For CSTR where a vapor phase is present:
• The pressure at any point in time is determined by the
conditions in the vessel, that is, the temperature and the
component holdups.
• The outlet vapor flow rate is initially set at the steady-state
value but can be manipulated to control the pressure.
For CSTR where only liquid phases are present:
• The pressure in the reactor is fixed at the steady-state value.
• The outlet flow rate is initially fixed at the steady-state value
but can be manipulated to control the liquid level.
For PFR:
• The pressure change through the reactor is fixed to the steady-
state value.
• The outlet flow rate is determined by material balance.

Pressure and Level Control for RGibbs

Note If the PFR or instantaneous options are selected, no
controllers are automatically added.
For CSTR geometry, pressure and level controllers are
automatically added to the flowsheet when appropriate:
Controller added When Measured Manipulated
variable variable
Pressure Vapor holdup is modeled Pressure in vessel Vapor outlet molar flow rate
Level Liquid holdup is modeled Liquid level Liquid outlet mass flow rate
For pressure-driven simulations:
Checks are made during the export from Aspen Plus to see if there
is a valve on the outlet stream of the RGibbs block. If a valve is
present in the current hierarchy, then the controller will manipulate
the valve position.
Controller added When Measured Manipulated
variable variable
Pressure Vapor-only option is used Pressure in vessel Valve position for the valve on
the outlet stream
Level Liquid-only option is used Liquid level Valve position for the valve on
the outlet stream

6-14 • Reactors Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 If no valve is present in the current hierarchy, then the controller
output is not connected and you should connect the controller
output (OP) to an appropriate manipulated variable elsewhere in
the flowsheet.
This is normally sufficient to ensure that the dynamic simulation
runs at steady state until a disturbance is introduced. For some
processes, you may need to add temperature controllers to ensure
that the dynamic simulation runs at steady state, particularly if you
are using the Constant Duty option to model heat transfer in a
block.
If the PFR or instantaneous options are selected, no controllers are
automatically added.
Specifying RGibbs for Use the RGibbs Dynamic form to add the specifications for
Dynamic Simulations dynamic simulations.
If you choose Specify
this geometry type
Instantaneous reactor (default) No other specifications in addition
to those given for steady-state
simulation
CSTR Reactor geometry
PFR Reactor geometry

Specifying the Reactor Geometry for RGibbs

CSTR Geometry
For CSTR geometry specify the vessel type and dimensions.
Choose one of these vessel types:
• A vertical vessel (default)
• A horizontal vessel
Choose one of these head types:
If the heads are Specify this or internal diameter
2:1 Elliptical (default) Tangent to tangent length
Hemispherical Tangent to tangent length
Flat plate Internal length
PFR Geometry

For PFR, specify the length and internal diameter of the reactor.
For more information about vessel geometry, see the Aspen
Dynamics User Guide, Chapter 1.

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Reactors • 6-15

 Specifying the Initial Liquid Volume Fraction for RGibbs
For CSTR geometry with a single liquid phase, specify the initial
liquid volume fraction. This is the volume of liquid in the vessel at
the start of the simulation divided by the total volume of the
vessel. The default value is 0.5.
If the steady-state simulation calculates a Then the vessel will
vapor fraction of initially be
Zero Full of liquid
One Empty

Specifying CSTR Heat Transfer for RGibbs in Dynamic

Simulations
Three methods of modeling heating or cooling within the reactor
are available. Choose one of these heat transfer calculation
methods:
If you choose Specify Description
Constant duty (default) No additional input Duty is specified. It is initially equal
to the steady-state value but you can
manipulate it during the simulation
either manually or by using a
controller. Constant duty is a useful
approximation for many situations.
Constant temperature Medium temperature Corresponds to the case where you
have a condensing or boiling fluid
exchanging its latent heat
LMTD • Inlet temperature of the medium Corresponds to the case where you
• Heat capacity of the medium have a fluid whose temperature
changes as it exchanges sensible heat.
• Initial closest temperature approach Initial medium flow rate is
between medium and process fluid automatically calculated, but you can
manipulate it during the simulation
either manually or by using a
controller.

6-16 • Reactors Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 RCSTR in Dynamic Simulations
Use RCSTR to model a stirred tank reactor for which the reaction
kinetics are known. You can use the built-in Power law or
Langmuir-Hinshelwood kinetics (see the start of this chapter), or
your own kinetics model.
Reverse flow is supported, but equilibrium reaction is not.
The dynamic model assumes perfect mixing and that all phases are
always in equilibrium. The dynamic model provides a choice of
methods for modeling reactor heating and cooling, and pressure
relief system.
These points summarize the dynamic RCSTR model:
• Reverse flow is supported
• The reaction and thermodynamic equations used are
appropriate for solving typical emergency relief scenarios as
well as process design problems. These could be, for example,
similar to those used in Aspen Plus.
• All phases have multiple feed and draw points as well as
multiple relief points.
• An external duty calculation enables you to configure various
scenarios.
• The heat capacity of the wall, any reactor internals and solid
catalyst can be accounted for, if required.
• The reactor can operate in batch or semi-batch mode as well as
continuously.
• Catalyst deactivation can be accounted for if required.
• The volume of solid catalyst can be accounted for in
rate/residence time calculations.

Pressure/Flow Effects for RCSTR

Although RCSTR can include multiple phases, it may have a
single outlet stream. In this case, the dynamic model enables the
outlet flow rate of each phase to be manipulated independently and
then mixes these flows at the outlet of the model.
If a vapor phase is present:
• The pressure in the vessel at any point in time is determined by
the conditions in the vessel, that is, the component holdups and
temperature.

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Reactors • 6-17

 • The vapor outlet flow rate is initially at the steady-state value
and can be manipulated to control the pressure during dynamic
simulations.
If there is no vapor phase present:
• The pressure is fixed at the steady-state value.
If a liquid phase is present:
• The liquid outlet flow rate is initially at the steady-state value,
and can be manipulated to control the level during dynamic
simulations.

Liquid Pressure for RCSTR

The pressure effect of liquid head for RCSTR is considered for the:
• Single liquid phase model
• 2- or 3- phase model with a liquid outlet stream
To model this effect the parameter LiquidHead should be set to
Yes:
Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value
LiquidHead Liquid outlet pressure No No
includes hydrostatic head Yes
When LiquidHead is set to Yes, the outlet pressure takes account
of the liquid level and the liquid outlet stream elevation change.
You need to specify the liquid outlet stream elevation change:
Variable Description Default Value
Veshead Liquid outlet stream elevation change 0

6-18 • Reactors Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 Pressure, Temperature, and Level Control for RCSTR
Pressure, temperature, and level controllers are automatically
added to the flowsheet when appropriate.
For flow-driven simulations:
Controller When Measured Manipulated
added variable variable
Pressure Vapor holdup is modeled Pressure in vessel Vapor outlet molar
flow rate
Temperature Constant duty is used and duty is Temperature in vessel Reactor duty
non-zero
Level Liquid holdup is modeled Liquid level Liquid outlet mass
flow rate
Level Liquid holdup is modeled and two Liquid interface level Liquid 2 outlet mass
liquid phases are present flow rate

For pressure-driven simulations:

Checks are made during the export from Aspen Plus to see if there
is a valve on each outlet stream of the RCSTR block. If a valve is
present in the current hierarchy, then the controller will manipulate
the valve position.
Controller When Measured Manipulated
added variable variable
Pressure Vapor holdup is modeled Pressure in vessel Valve position for the
valve on the vapor outlet
stream
Temperature Constant duty is used and duty Temperature in vessel Reactor duty
is non-zero
Level Liquid holdup is modeled Liquid level Valve position for the
valve on the liquid outlet
stream
Level Liquid holdup is modeled and Liquid interface level Valve position for the
two liquid phases are present valve on the liquid 2
outlet stream
If no valve is present in the current hierarchy, then the controller
output is not connected and you should connect the controller
output (OP) to an appropriate manipulated variable elsewhere in
the flowsheet.

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Reactors • 6-19

 Reverse Flow for RCSTR is supported in reverse flow simulations. When
RCSTR in Dynamic configuring your simulation for reverse flow, use the RFlowPhase
Simulations parameter on the RCSTR AllVariables form to specify which
phase in the RCSTR will flow out through the feed stream(s) if the
pressure gradients cause the flows in those streams to reverse. You
can select the vapor phase (Vapor), the 1st liquid phase (Liquid1),
the 2nd liquid phase (Liquid2), a homogeneous liquid phase
mixture (Liquid) or a homogeneous three phase mixture (Mixed)
with the same phase fractions as in the Decanter. The default value
is Mixed.
When reverse flow is enabled, material flow may enter or exit
RCSTR via any of its connected streams, depending on the
pressure gradients around the flowsheet.
Note If you specify a pressure drop for RCSTR in Aspen Plus,
the inlet stream pressure will not equal the block pressure and, for
the dynamic simulation, the inlet pressure change will be fixed to
the steady state value. Upon export to Aspen Dynamics, the
Pressure Checker will warn you that this fixed pressure drop will
not vary with flow rate. If you ignore this warning when using
RCSTR in reverse flow simulations, when the flow reverses you
may get misleading results and/or convergence problems. You can
avoid this by specifying the inlet pressure drop in RCSTR to zero
and modeling an inlet pressure drop which does vary with flow
rate using a Valve.
For more information, see Creating a Reverse Flow Simulation in
Chapter 3 of the Aspen Dynamics User Guide.
Specifying RCSTR for Use the RCSTR Dynamic form to add the specifications for
Dynamic Simulations dynamic simulations.
You must specify:
• The reactor geometry (head type and vessel size)
• The method for modeling heat transfer
• The initial volume fraction
• The method for modeling equipment heat transfer
For vertical and horizontal vessels you can choose to model
equipment heat capacity and heat transfer with the environment.

Specifying the Reactor Geometry for RCSTR

The reactor can be modeled as either a vertical (default) or
horizontal tank.
Specify the reactor size:

6-20 • Reactors Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 If you choose this head type Specify this or internal diameter
Elliptical Tangent to tangent length
Hemispherical Tangent to tangent length
Flat plate Internal length

You can specify either the vessel diameter or the vessel length.
The other dimension is calculated from the volume, or residence
time specification entered for the steady-state simulation.

For more information about vessel geometry, see the Aspen

Dynamics User Guide, Chapter 1.

Specifying the Heat Transfer Method for RCSTR

Three methods of modeling heating or cooling within the reactor
are available.
Choose one of the following heat transfer calculation methods:
If you choose Specify Description
Constant duty (default) No additional input Duty is specified. It is initially equal to
the steady-state value but can be
manipulated during the simulation either
manually or by using a controller.
Constant duty is a useful approximation
for many situations.
Constant temperature Medium temperature Corresponds to the case where you have a
condensing or boiling fluid exchanging
its latent heat
LMTD • Inlet temperature of Corresponds to the case where you have a
the medium fluid whose temperature changes as it
• Heat capacity of the exchanges sensible heat. Initial medium
medium flow rate is automatically calculated, but
can be manipulated during the simulation
• Initial closest either manually or by using a controller.
temperature approach
between medium and
process fluid
Dynamic Inlet temperature of the Corresponds to the case when you have a
medium. well-mixed heating/cooling jacket
Heat capacity of the
medium
Initial closest
temperature approach
between medium and
process fluid
Mass holdup of the
medium

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Reactors • 6-21

 Specifying the Initial Liquid Volume Fraction for RCSTR
With a single liquid phase, specify the initial liquid volume
fraction. The initial liquid volume fraction is the volume of liquid
in the reactor at the start of simulation divided by the total volume
of the reactor. The default value is 0.5.

If the steady-state Then the reactor will initially be

simulation calculates a
vapor fraction of
Zero Full of liquid
One Empty

Specifying Equipment Heat Transfer for RCSTR in Dynamic

Simulations
For vertical and horizontal vessels, you can choose to model
equipment heat capacity and heat transfer with the environment:

If you model You must enter

Equipment Heat Capacity The mass of the vessel
The specific heat capacity
Heat Transfer with the The overall heat transfer coefficient
Environment The ambient temperature on the Setup
Specifications Global sheet

Specifying the When simulating a pressure relief system, the RCSTR model
Pressure Relief enables you to specify the following:
RCSTR Model • Reactions
• Geometry
• Holdups
• Heating
• Disengagement
• Catalyst

Specifying Reactions for the RCSTR Model

The reactions are specified in Aspen Plus and exported to Aspen
Dynamics.
Reaction configuration can be found on the Reactions tab of the
Configure form. You can also access this by opening the
Configure_Reactions form.

6-22 • Reactors Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 Note The reaction parameter settings available depend on which
reaction mechanism you choose.

General
• Reactions on/off
Power Law
• Number of reactions
• Reaction concentration basis
• Reaction phase
• Activation energy
• Pre-exponential factor
• Stoichiometric coefficient for each component
• Temperature exponent
For more information on the equations, see the start of this chapter.
Langmuir-Hinshelwood-Hougen-Watson
• Number of reactions
• Number of reaction terms
• Reaction concentration basis
• Reaction phase
• Activation energy
• Pre-exponential factor
• Stoichiometric coefficient for each component
• Temperature exponent
• Adsorption constant
• Driving force 1 constant
• Driving force 2 constant
• Adsorption power
• Adsorption exponent
• Driving force 1 exponent
• Driving force 2 exponent
For more information on the equations, see the start of this chapter

User Kinetics
• Stoichiometric coefficient for each component
• User constants
• User reaction subroutine name

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Reactors • 6-23

 Specifying Geometry for the RCSTR Model
To specify the reactor geometry, open the Configure form and
select the Vessel tab.

Specifying Holdups for the RCSTR Model

To make simple specifications, such as Pressure, Temperature,
Total mass:
• Open the Configure form and select the Holdup tab.
To access the options for specifying holdups on a mass basis:
• Open the Configure Holdups Mass form and change the
variables, being careful to maintain a realistic definition.
To specify holdups on a molar basis:
• Open the Configure Holdups Mole form and change the
variables, being careful to maintain a realistic definition.
For more information on realistic definitions, see Initializing the
RCSTR Model on page 6-26.

Specifying Heating for the RCSTR Model

To specify heating, open the Configure Heating form and select the
Heat Transfer tab.
On the Heat Transfer/Heating tab, you can specify these scenarios:
• Condensing
• Constant duty
• Constant medium temperature
• LMTD
On the Heat Transfer/Cooling tab, you can specify these scenarios:
• Constant duty
• Constant medium temperature
• LMTD

6-24 • Reactors Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 On the Heat transfer/Equipment tab, you can specify these options:

For Equipment Heat Transfer For Calculating

Equipment Heat Transfer
HeatTransferConstTemp Internals & wall
NoHeatTransfer Internals only
HeatTransferVarTemp

Specifying Disengagement for the RCSTR Model

To specify disengagement, open the Configure form and select the
Disengagement tab. On this form, you can change the following:
• Method for disengagement
Vapor/Liquid/Homogeneous/DIERS Bubbly/DIERS Bubbly-
Morris/DIERS Churn-Turbulent/User
• Method for coupling equation DIERS/General
• DIERS data-correlating parameter, C0
• Set level for user method
• Low level for vapor breakthrough
• Method for calculating void fraction Analytical/Sheppard
Various correlations for estimating the liquid swell height due to a
certain relief rate are supplied, some of these (the DIERS methods)
were developed for constant cross-section area vessels (vertical
cylindrical) and so a further correlation method (by Sheppard) is
required to use these methods for other vessel geometries. Two
versions of the coupling equations are cited in literature: a
simplified version in DIERS, and a more general version. You can
select method. One of the DIERS disengagement methods
(Bubbly) has a serious approximation that has been corrected for
by Morris, hence the DIERS Bubbly-Morris method.
The supplied disengagement methods are:

Method Description
Vapor Only vapor
Liquid Only liquid
Liquid with Breakthrough Liquid until level reaches low limit, then
homogeneous
Homogeneous Fully mixed
DIERS Bubbly From DIERS manual
DIERS Bubbly-Morris As above with corrections from Morris
DIERS Churn-Turbulent From DIERS manual

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Reactors • 6-25

 User Vapor until liquid reaches defined height,
then homogeneous

Tip The key to the above methods is to predict when the liquid
swells to the vent line and when it does, to calculate the quality of
the fluid venting.

Specifying Catalyst Information for the RCSTR Model

Catalyst Volume
By default, the volume of solid catalyst is ignored for
rate/residence time calculations.
To account for catalyst volume, open the Configure form and do
the following on the Catalyst tab:
• Uncheck "Ignore catalyst volume in rate calculations"
• Specify the following:
- Bed voidage (Fraction of reactor volume NOT occupied
by solid catalyst).
- Catalyst particle density.
Catalyst Deactivation
To specify catalyst deactivation, open the Configure form. The
deactivation is considered as a limiting factor on the reaction rates
(0-1) and is assumed to effect all reactions equally.
On the Catalyst tab, you can specify these scenarios:
• Catalyst deactivation Off/Constant/Time & Temperature-
dependent
• Catalyst deactivation factor
• Catalyst deactivation parameter, K1
• Catalyst deactivation parameter, K2
• Catalyst deactivation parameter, K3
• Catalyst deactivation parameter, K4
• Catalyst deactivation temperature exponent, n
Initializing the RCSTR The reactor model is intended to be initialized from an Aspen Plus
Model simulation. However, you may need to initialize it within Aspen
Dynamics if you wish to:
• Make various additional specifications that cannot be made
directly in Aspen Plus
• Change the existing specifications without having to rerun the
Aspen Plus simulation

6-26 • Reactors Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 Important To make any additional specifications, you must first
select the pressure relief vapor/liquid disengagement option.

Selecting the Disengagement Option

The following procedure assumes that you are performing
Initialization runs. If you change any variable specifications, you
should revert to the default specifications before performing a
Dynamic run.
To activate the pressure relief equations in RCSTR:
1. On the flowsheet, click the required reactor block, then click
the right mouse button, point to Forms and click Configure.
2. On the Vessel tab of the Configure form, select the "Perform
pressure relief vapor/liquid disengagement calculations"
check box.
3. Run the simulation.

Specify Temperature for the RCSTR Model

To specify temperature for the RCSTR model:
1. Open the Configure form.
2. On the Holdup tab, select the Specify Temperature check box.
3. Change the value of Temperature as required.
4. Click the Initialize button.
Note If you choose an unrealistic temperature, the simulation
may fail to converge.

Specify Pressure with Inerts for the RCSTR Model

To specify pressure with inerts for the RCSTR model:
1. On the Holdup tab of the Configure form, select the inert
component.
2. Select the Specify Pressure check box.
3. Change the specification of Pressure to Initial.
4. Click the Initialize button.
Note If you choose an unrealistic pressure, the simulation may
fail to converge.

Specify Pressure without Inerts for the RCSTR Model

To specify pressure without inerts for the RCSTR model:
1. On the Holdup tab of the Configure form, select the Specify
Pressure check box.
2. Change the value of Pressure as required.

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Reactors • 6-27

 3. Click the Initialize button.
Notes
• If you choose an unrealistic pressure the simulation may fail to
converge.
• With no inerts, you cannot specify both temperature and
pressure (equilibrium is assumed).

Specify Total Mass for the RCSTR Model

To specify total mass for the RCSTR model:
1. On the Holdup tab of the Configure form, select the Specify
Total Mass check box.
2. Change the value of Total Mass as required.
3. Click the Initialize button.
Notes
• If you choose an unrealistic total mass (for example, more
mass than can fit in the vessel), the simulation may fail to
converge
• You need to specify the pressure and/or temperature.

Specify the Mass Fraction of Either Phase for the RCSTR

Model
To specify the mass fraction of either phase for the RCSTR model:
1. On the Holdup tab of the Configure form, enable either the
Specify Total Mass checkbox, or the Specify Total Moles
checkbox.
2. Enable the Specify Components checkbox.
3. Change the values of the component fractions or holdups, as
required.
4. Click the Initialize button.
Notes
• If you choose an unrealistic total mass (for example, more
mass than can fit in the vessel), the simulation may fail to
converge.
• If you choose unrealistic values for the mass fractions (for
example, sum to greater than 1), the simulation may fail to
converge.
• You need to specify the pressure and/or temperature.

6-28 • Reactors Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 Specify Volume Fraction for the RCSTR Model
To specify volume fraction for the RCSTR model:
1. On the Holdup tab on the Configure form, select the Specify
Vapor Volume check box.
2. Change the value of Vapor Volume Fraction as required.
3. Click the Initialize button.
Notes
• If you choose an unrealistic volume fraction, the simulation
may fail to converge.
• You need to specify the pressure and/or temperature.

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Reactors • 6-29

 Displaying Results To display results for the RCSTR model, open the required results
for RCSTR Model form. These forms are available for displaying results:

This form Displays

Relief Pressure
Vent Mass Flow
Liquid Volume
Swelled Volume
Quality in Vent
Results Components
Temperature
Pressure
Duty
Component Reaction Rates
Molar Vapor Fraction
Component Concentrations
Vapor Component Mole Fractions
Liquid Component Mole Fractions
Liquid Level
ResultsPlot Pressure
Temperature
Level
Total Mass
Duty
ReliefPlot Pressure
Vent Mass Flow
Vessel Volume
Liquid Volume
Swelled Volume
Quality in Vent
ResultsSummary Pressure
Temperature
Liquid Mass
Total volume
Liquid volume
Swelled volume
Venting flow
Vent quality
Diagram of liquid levels
Duty
Using Your Own When using your own Aspen Plus Fortran subroutine to calculate
Fortran in RCSTR reaction rates in Aspen Dynamics, make sure the object code for
Dynamic Simulations your subroutine is present in the directory where you carried out
your Aspen Plus simulation before exporting the Aspen Dynamics
input file.

6-30 • Reactors Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 Additional Equations The RCSTR model uses the following equations:
for the RCSTR Model • Heat transfer
• Heat exchange to internals
• Catalyst deactivation
• Disengagement

Heat Transfer Equations

The following equations describe heat transfer for the RCSTR
model:
A
Q = QC
AM
1
h − h0
A = A 0 + ( AM − A 0 )
hM − h 0 0
OR
Q = (UliqAliq + UvapAvap )∆T
Aliq = Wetted Area
Avap = AW − Aliq
∆T = TW − TR
OR
(TMI − TR ) − (TMO − TR )
∆T =
 TMI − TR 
LOGe 
 TMO − TR 
Where:
Q = Duty transferred to reactor contents (W)
QC = Constant duty (W)
U = Heat transfer coefficient (J/Kg/K)
U liq = Liquid heat transfer coefficient to wall (J/Kg/K)
Uvap = Vapor heat transfer coefficient to wall (J/Kg/K)
∆T = Temperature difference (°C)
A = Actual heat transfer area (m 2 )
AM = Maximum heat transfer area (m 2 )
A0 = Minimum heat transfer area (m 2 )
AW = Area of reactor wall (m 2 )
Aliq = Area of liquid in contact with wall (m 2 )
Avap = Area of vapor in contact with wall (m 2 )

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Reactors • 6-31

 h = Actual liquid level (m)
hM = Liquid level for maximum heat transfer (m)
h0 = Liquid level for minimum heat transfer (m)
TR = Temperature of reactor contents (°C)
TW = Temperature of wall (°C)
TMI = Inlet temperature of heating/cooling medium (°C)
TMO = Outlet temperature of heating/cooling medium (°C)

Heat Exchange to Internals Equations

The following equations describe heat exchange to internals for the
RCSTR model:
dTI
MICp = UA(TR − TI ) = QI
dt
Where:
QT = Heat transfer to internals (W)
MT = Mass of internals (kg)
CP = Heat Capacity of internals (J/Kg/K)
U = Heat transfer coefficient (W/m 2 /K)
A = Area for heat transfer (m 2 )
TR = Temperature of reactor contents (°C)
TT = Internals temperature (°C)

Catalyst Deactivation Equations

For short-term deactivation, the RCSTR model uses:
d (cat )
= K 1 + K 2 ⋅ cat + (K 3 + K 4 ⋅ cat ) ⋅ T n
dt
Where:
cat = Catalyst activation (-)
K1-K4 = User constants
n = User defined exponent (-)
T = Temperature (K)
For long term deactivation you can set the deactivation factor
directly.

Disengagement Equations
The equations for disengagement are taken from Fisher, 1992.

6-32 • Reactors Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 RPlug in Dynamic Simulations
Use dynamic RPlug to model plug flow reactors with known
reaction kinetics. You can use the built-in Power law or Langmuir-
Hinshelwood kinetics (see the start of this chapter), or your own
kinetics model. Equilibrium reactions are not supported.
You can also use dynamic RPlug to model the heat transfer effect
between the process fluid and a solid catalyst. The solid catalyst
mass transfer effect is not modeled.
RPlug assumes:
• Uni-directional flow (reverse flow is not supported)
• No axial mixing and no axial heat conduction.
In dynamic simulations, the reactor pressure drop is related to the
flow rate through the reactor. However, the coolant pressure drop
is fixed at the steady-state value.
Ensure RPlug has a realistic pressure profile in your steady-state
simulation. A dynamic simulation cannot be generated if there is a
zero pressure drop along the reactor length.
Cooling Options for These cooling options are supported for dynamic simulations:
RPlug Cooling Type Description
TCOOL_SPEC Reactor with constant cooling temperature
ADIABATIC Adiabatic reactor
CO-COOL Reactor with co-current external coolant.
The coolant can be one-, two- or three-
phase.
COUNTER-COOL Reactor with counter-current external
coolant.
The coolant can be one-, two- or three-
phase.
T_SPEC is not supported.
The realistic dynamic simulation of a plug flow reactor with
cooling is best accomplished with a model of the shell side
coolant. Therefore, the only cooling options available are:
• Constant cooling
• Co-current cooling
• Counter-current cooling.

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Reactors • 6-33

 A boiling coolant is effectively the same as a constant coolant
temperature specification available in Aspen Plus. A high flow rate
coolant usually gives a constant temperature in the reactor, and is
similar to a constant reactor temperature specification in Aspen
Plus.

Temperature Difference Driving Force for Coolant Model

RPlug includes two options that enable you to model the
temperature difference driving force between the reactor and
coolant, when the coolant type is specified as either CO-COOL or
COUNTER-COOL:
Temperature Difference Description
Driving Force
Point (default) The temperature driving force is the
difference between the point values of
the temperatures on the process and
coolant sides in each element.
LMTD The temperature driving force uses a
logarithmic mean temperature
difference between the process and
coolant side temperatures in each
element.
Using the LMTD option may improve the accuracy of simulations
with sharp temperature gradients and relatively few discretization
elements.
Pressure/Flow Effects For the process stream, the outlet flow is related to the pressure by
for RPlug a Bernoulli type expression:
∂ρ / ∂x = K ∗ (Rho∗ v 2 / diam )
Where:
∂p / ∂x = The pressure drop per unit length
K = Flow constant
Rho = Fluid density
ν = Fluid velocity
diam = Reactor diameter
The flow constant K is fixed during the dynamic simulation. Its
value is calculated using the Aspen Plus results to give the same
steady-state pressure drop as in the Aspen Plus simulation.
For single liquid phase models, the liquid outlet flow rate is
determined by the mass balance on the reactor. This approach does
not work for single vapor phase models or for two or three phase
models, because the vapor phase is compressible. Instead, a

6-34 • Reactors Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 pressure controller that measures the outlet pressure and
manipulates the outlet flow is automatically inserted with RPlug.
For the coolant streams, the outlet flow rate is always equal to the
inlet flow rate, and the pressure drop across the length of the
reactor is set.
Using Your Own Modeling user kinetics is supported in dynamic RPlug. User heat
Fortran in RPlug transfer and pressure drop models are not supported.
Dynamic Simulations When using your own Aspen Plus Fortran subroutine to calculate
reaction rates in Aspen Dynamics, make sure the object code for
your subroutine is present in the directory where you carried out
your Aspen Plus simulation before exporting the Aspen Dynamics
input file.
Modeling RPlug in Aspen Plus and Aspen Dynamics use different solution strategies
Aspen Plus and for RPlug:
Aspen Dynamics Aspen Plus is a sequential-modular, steady state simulation
package that uses a variable step Gear-type integration algorithm
to integrate the RPlug model equations over the reactor length.
Aspen Dynamics is an equation-based, dynamic simulation
package and requires models to be written as a deterministic set of
equations. Thus for spatially distributed models such as Rplug,
which are described by systems of partial differential and algebraic
equations (PDAEs), a stepwise integration scheme cannot be used.
Instead, in Aspen Dynamics, RPlug is modeled using a fixed finite
difference discretization scheme that transforms the PDAE system
into a system of ordinary differential and algebraic equations
(DAEs). The DAE system is then integrated dynamically using the
in-built solvers. This approach is known as the Method of Lines.
These different solution strategies between Aspen Plus and Aspen
Dynamics inevitably introduce some mismatch between the two
versions of RPlug. For example, when exporting a simulation
involving RPlug from Aspen Plus to Aspen Dynamics, the initial
point calculated from the Aspen Plus results may not be at steady
state. You can help to reduce this model mismatch in RPlug by
avoiding sharp axial temperature and composition gradients,
and/or increasing the number of discretization points in Aspen Plus
before exporting to Aspen Dynamics. A good rule for selecting the
number of points is to use five points for every 10°C change in
temperature or 10% change in composition.

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Reactors • 6-35

 Specifying RPlug for Aspen Dynamics uses a one-dimensional, first order, finite
Dynamic Simulations difference scheme to solve the partial differential equations for the
RPlug reactor. As with any discretization method, there is a certain
amount of error due to the finite size of each element. You can
reduce this error by increasing the number of elements in the
model.
Increase the number of finite difference elements by going to the
Block-Options sheet and selecting the number of profile points.
The default is 10. However, large temperature or composition
changes will require more points.
Tip A good rule for selecting the number of points is to use five
points for every 10°C change in temperature or 10% change in
composition.
The dynamic simulation of some reactors may require more than
50 points.

Specifying the Catalyst Heat Transfer for RPlug

Use the RPlug Dynamic Catalyst Specification sheet to add the
RPlug specifications for dynamic simulations.
Choose one of the following three methods of modeling the heat
transfer between the catalyst and the process fluid:

If you choose Specify Description

No heat transfer No additional input No catalyst present, or the
(default) effect of heat transfer between
catalyst and process fluid on
the reactor dynamics is
neglected.
Heat transfer at • Voidage fraction of catalyst There is very fast heat transfer
equal temperatures • Heat capacity of catalyst between the catalyst and
process fluid, and they are
• Mass density of catalyst assumed to be always at the
same temperature.
Heat transfer at • Voidage fraction of catalyst This is the most rigorous
different • Heat capacity of catalyst option. Heat transfer between
temperatures the catalyst and process fluid is
• Mass density of catalyst determined by their
• Specific surface area of catalyst temperature differential,
• Overall heat transfer coefficient contact area, and overall heat
transfer coefficient.

6-36 • Reactors Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

7 Pressure Changers

This chapter describes pressure changer models:

• Compr
• MCompr
• Pump
• Valve
• Pipe

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Pressure Changers • 7-1

 Compr in Dynamic Simulations
Use Compr to represent:
• Polytropic centrifugal or axial flow compressors
• Polytropic positive displacement compressors
• Isentropic centrifugal or axial flow compressors
• Isentropic centrifugal turbines
• Rigorous polytropic centrifugal or axial flow compressors
The following compressor types are supported in Aspen
Dynamics:
• Isentropic
• GPSA polytropic with GPSA basis = suction
• GPSA isentropic with GPSA basis = suction
• ASME polytropic
• ASME isentropic
• Positive displacement
• Polytropic with piecewise integration
• Positive displacement with piecewise integration
Types GPSA polytropic and GPSA isentropic with GPSA basis =
average are not supported.
Compr does not support reverse flow.
Pressure/Flow Effects The discharge pressure is a function of the power input to the
for Compr compressor. It is initially at the steady-state value, but may be
controlled by manipulating the power input to the compressor,
which is also initially at the steady-state value. You can do this by
changing the power directly or by adding a controller.
In a flow driven simulation, when an isentropic turbine is modeled,
you specify the discharge pressure and the power output is
calculated.
In a pressure driven simulation, when an isentropic turbine is
modeled, you specify the power output and the discharge pressure
is calculated.
The discharge flow rate is determined by the material balance.
Using Performance When using performance curves for Compr in a dynamic
Curves for Compr simulation, note the following points:

Operating range for Compr

When specifying the curve data, take care to ensure that the shape
of the performance and efficiency curves is correct over the entire

7-2 • Pressure Changers Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 operating range expected during the dynamic simulation. This is
especially important if the compressor is to be shut down or if it
may go into the surge/stonewall region during the dynamic
simulation.

Extrapolation beyond Surge and Stonewall for Compr

When the curves are supplied in the form of tabular data, both
Aspen Plus and Aspen Dynamics treat the point with the minimum
flow as the surge point, and the point with the maximum flow as
the stonewall point.
• For polynomial curves, a surge flow and stonewall point are
specified
• For extended polynomial curves, a surge line is also supplied.
If the operating point moves beyond the surge or stonewall point
there are two options for extrapolation, depending on whether you
have checked Extrapolate beyond Surge/Stonewall in Aspen Plus:
• Checked  In Aspen Dynamics, the curve fitted from tabular
data or specified as a polynomial is used to extrapolate beyond
Surge or Stonewall. This option can also be selected in Aspen
Dynamics by setting Extrapolate beyond Surge/Stonewall to
Yes on the Performance Curves form.
• Not checked  In Aspen Dynamics, linear extrapolation from
the surge or stonewall point is used. This differs from the linear
extrapolation used in Aspen Plus. You can also select this
option in Aspen Dynamics by setting Extrapolate beyond
Surge/Stonewall to No on the Performance Curves form.
For a flow driven simulation:
• Performance variable (head) increases slightly as the flow is
reduced below the surge point
• Performance variable (head) decreases sharply as the flow is
increased above the stonewall point. It is also clipped to a
lower limit of zero.
For a pressure driven simulation:
• Flow decreases sharply as the performance variable (head) is
increased above the surge point. It is also clipped to a lower
limit of zero.
• Flow increases slightly as the performance variable (head) is
reduced below the stonewall point

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Pressure Changers • 7-3

 Efficiency for Compr
The same extrapolation options are available for efficiency.
However, linear extrapolation is not recommended.
There is a further option to clip the efficiency between specified
bounds. The default bounds are:
EffMin: 1E-5
EffMax: 1.0
These can be changed on the Compr Performance Curve form in
Aspen Dynamics.
Specifying Compr for Use the Compr Dynamic Model Specification sheet to enter the
Dynamic Simulations compressor type option.
Also use this sheet to enter the dynamic compressor specifications.
To Do this
Ignore inertia effects Select the Instantaneous option
Model the effect of inertia Select the Dynamic option
on any change in Enter the moment of inertia
compressor speed
Enter driver gear ratio (compressor
speed/driver speed)

MCompr in Dynamic Simulations

Use MCompr to represent:
• Multi-stage polytropic centrifugal or axial flow compressors
• Multi-stage polytropic positive displacement compressors
• Multi-stage isentropic centrifugal or axial flow compressors
• Multi-stage isentropic centrifugal turbines
• Multi-stage rigorous polytropic centrifugal or axial flow
compressors
The following compressor types are supported in Aspen
Dynamics:
• Isentropic
• GPSA polytropic with GPSA basis = suction
• GPSA isentropic with GPSA basis = suction
• ASME polytropic
• ASME isentropic
• Positive displacement

7-4 • Pressure Changers Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 Types GPSA polytropic and GPSA isentropic with GPSA basis =
average are not supported.
MCompr does not support:
• Free-water calculations
• Global liquid knockout streams
• Specifying curve speed using rotor tip Mach number
• Wheel curves
• User Subroutine for Performance Curves
• Reverse flow
Pressure/Flow Effects The discharge pressure for each stage is a function of the power
for MCompr input to the compressor stage. It is initially at the steady-state
value, but may be controlled by manipulating the power input to
the compressor stage, which is also initially at the steady-state
value. You can do this by changing the power directly or by
adding a controller.
The pressure drop across each intercooler and the aftercooler is
related to the outlet volumetric flow rate by:
∆P = K ⋅ Rho ⋅ Fv _ out 2

Where:
K = A constant determined by fitting to steady-
state conditions
∆P = Pressure drop
Rho = Mass density at outlet conditions
Fv_out = Outlet volumetric flow rate
If the steady-state simulation predicts a pressure rise, the pressure
drop equation is not used. Instead the pressure difference will be
specified.
When an isentropic turbine is modeled, the discharge pressure is
specified and the power output is calculated.
The discharge flow rate is determined by the material balance.
Where liquid knockout streams are modeled, their flow rates are
also determined by the material balance.
Using Performance When using performance curves for MCompr in a dynamic
Curves for MCompr simulation, note the following points:

Operating range for MCompr

When specifying the curve data, take care to ensure that the shape
of the performance and efficiency curves is correct over the entire
operating range expected during the dynamic simulation. This is

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Pressure Changers • 7-5

 especially important if the compressor is to be shut down or if it
may go into the surge/stonewall region during the dynamic
simulation.

Extrapolation beyond Surge and Stonewall for MCompr

When the curves are supplied in the form of tabular data, both
Aspen Plus and Aspen Dynamics treat the point with the minimum
flow as the surge point, and the point with the maximum flow as
the stonewall point.
• For polynomial curves, a surge flow and stonewall point are
specified
• For extended polynomial curves, a surge line is also supplied.
If the operating point moves beyond the surge or stonewall point
there are two options for extrapolation, depending on whether you
have checked Extrapolate beyond Surge/Stonewall in Aspen Plus:
• Checked  In Aspen Dynamics, the curve fitted from tabular
data or specified as a polynomial is used to extrapolate beyond
Surge or Stonewall. This option can also be selected in Aspen
Dynamics by setting Extrapolate beyond Surge/Stonewall to
Yes on the Performance Curves form.
• Not checked  In Aspen Dynamics, linear extrapolation from
the surge or stonewall point is used. This differs from the linear
extrapolation used in Aspen Plus. You can also select this
option in Aspen Dynamics by setting Extrapolate beyond
Surge/Stonewall to No on the Performance Curves form.
For a flow driven simulation:
• Performance variable (head) increases slightly as the flow is
reduced below the surge point
• Performance variable (head) decreases sharply as the flow is
increased above the stonewall point. It is also clipped to a
lower limit of zero.
For a pressure driven simulation:
• Flow decreases sharply as the performance variable (head) is
increased above the surge point. It is also clipped to a lower
limit of zero.
• Flow increases slightly as the performance variable (head) is
reduced below the stonewall point

7-6 • Pressure Changers Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 Efficiency for MCompr
The same extrapolation options are available for efficiency.
However, linear extrapolation is not recommended.
There is a further option to clip the efficiency between specified
bounds. The default bounds are:
EffMin: 1E-5
EffMax: 1.0
These can be changed on the Compr Performance Curve form for
each stage in Aspen Dynamics.
Specifying MCompr Use the MCompr Dynamic Model Specification sheet to enter the
for Dynamic compressor type option.
Simulations Also use this sheet to enter the dynamic compressor specifications.
To Do this
Ignore inertia effects Select the Instantaneous option
Model the effect of inertia on any Select the Dynamic option
change in compressor speed Enter the moment of inertia
Enter driver gear ratio (compressor
speed/driver speed)

Pump in Dynamic Simulations

Use Pump to represent a pump or a hydraulic turbine. Pump does
not support reverse flow.
If you entered performance and efficiency curves in Aspen Plus,
then the same curves will be used in Aspen Dynamics.
If you did not enter performance and efficiency curves in Aspen
Plus, then the curves Head vs. suction volumetric flow rate and
Efficiency vs. suction volumetric flow rate for a centrifugal pump
or turbine are used to give realistic behavior during a dynamic
simulation.

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Pressure Changers • 7-7

 These typical curves are fitted around the operating point
calculated in Aspen Plus. The operating head, suction volumetric
flow rate and efficiency are multiplied by ratios to give typical
performance curves:
suction volumetric flow rate
Flow ratio =
operating suction volumetric flow rate

head
Head ratio =
operating head

hydraulic efficiency
Efficiency ratio =
operating hydraulic efficiency

This table shows the values of the ratios used to give typical
performance curves:
Point Flow ratio Head ratio Efficiency ratio
1 0.0 1.25 0.2
2 0.1667 1.24 0.4
3 0.3333 1.23 0.595
4 0.5 1.21 0.765
5 0.6667 1.17 0.893
6 0.8333 1.11 0.975
7 1.0 1.0 1.0
8 1.1667 0.82 0.93
9 1.3333 0.49 0.6
10 1.4167 0.0 0.2

7-8 • Pressure Changers Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 This plot shows head vs. suction volumetric flow rate:
1.4

1.2

Operating
point
1

0.8
Head ratio

0.6

0.4

0.2

0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6
Flow ratio

This plot shows efficiency vs. suction volumetric flow rate:

1.2
Operating
point
1

0.8
Efficiency ratio

0.6

0.4

0.2

0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6
Flow ratio

If the flow through the pump and pressure change across the pump
vary during the dynamic simulation, it is recommended that you
use performance curves.

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Pressure Changers • 7-9

 If you do not wish to use performance curves in Aspen Dynamics,
in the Configure form for the pump, change the value for
UseCurves to False. If performance curves are not used, these
variables are fixed during a dynamic simulation:

For a In a The following are normally fixed

Pump Flow driven simulation • Required electrical power
• Mechanical efficiency
• Hydraulic efficiency
Pump Pressure driven simulation • Required electrical power
• Mechanical efficiency
• Hydraulic efficiency
Turbine Flow driven simulation • Discharge pressure
• Mechanical efficiency
• Hydraulic efficiency
Turbine Pressure driven simulation • Required electrical power
• Mechanical efficiency
• Hydraulic efficiency

In some cases it may be more convenient to fix the pressure

difference across the pump instead of the electrical power. To do
this:
• In the Configure form, change the Spec for Specified Electrical
Power from Fixed to Free and the spec of Pressure Difference
from Free to Fixed.
Note If you wish to fix the pressure difference for a pump in a
pressure driven simulation you must ensure that the pressure on
one side of the pump is free to vary by placing a block with a
pressure drop/flow relationship, such as a valve, upstream or
downstream of the pump.

7-10 • Pressure Changers Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 Table of Ratios Used
This table shows the values of the ratios used to give typical
performance curves:

Point Flow ratio Head ratio Efficiency ratio

1 0.0 1.25 0.2
2 0.1667 1.24 0.4
3 0.3333 1.23 0.595
4 0.5 1.21 0.765
5 0.6667 1.17 0.893
6 0.8333 1.11 0.975
7 1.0 1.0 1.0
8 1.1667 0.82 0.93
9 1.3333 0.49 0.6
10 1.4167 0.0 0.2

About Pump Performance Curves

When performance curves are used, you should ensure that the
curve data covers the full range of operating conditions expected
during the dynamic simulation. If the operating point moves
beyond the range of the curve data, extrapolation will be used and
this may not give realistic behavior.
When curves are entered as tabular data, a cubic spline fit is used
to interpolate between the data points. The cubic spline fit is most
accurate when:
• The data points are evenly spread.
• The curve is smooth (gradually changing gradient with no
deviations).
When the curve data is entered as polynomial coefficients you
should check that the shape of the curve is realistic over the full
range of operating conditions expected during the dynamic
simulation.

Pressure/Flow Effects for Pump

When Performance Curves are Not Used
When performance curves are not used, the discharge pressure is a
function of the power input to the pump. It is initially equal to the
steady-state value, but you can change it by manipulating the
power input to the pump. Either change the power directly or add a
controller.

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Pressure Changers • 7-11

 When a turbine is modeled, the discharge pressure is specified and
the output power is calculated. The discharge flow rate is
determined by the material balance.
When Performance Curves are Used
When performance curves are used, they relate the head or
pressure change across the pump and the flow rate through the
pump.
For pressure driven simulations, the flow through the pump is
calculated from the head or pressure change across the pump.
For flow driven simulations, the head or pressure change across
the pump is calculated from the flow through the pump.

Valve in Dynamic Simulations

Valve relates the pressure drop across a valve to the flow
coefficient for the valve. Valve supports reverse flow.
There are six built-in characteristics equations which relates the
flow coefficient to the valve opening:
• Linear
• Parabolic
• Square root
• Quick opening
• Equal percentage
• Hyperbolic
A User defined characteristic values is also available.
Valve assumes adiabatic flow and can be used to model one-, two-,
and three-phase systems. Use Valve to:
• Model control valves or other flow resistances
• Check for choking flow conditions
Valve has no dynamic features.
For further details of the approach used in the Valve model, see
Aspen Plus Unit Operation Models.

Pressure/Flow Effects for Valve

If you select the Adiabatic Flash for Specified Outlet Pressure
(pressure change), default option, the dynamic model relates the
pressure drop to the flow through the valve.
Other options use the same valve equations as for the Aspen Plus
steady-state model. For multiphase valves you can override the

7-12 • Pressure Changers Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 ValidPhases setting and force Valve to use single phase
calculations for the pressure/flow effects, and the choking and
cavitation equations if applicable. This may be useful for valves at
near-critical or super-critical conditions. To use this option, set the
PresFlowCalcBasis on the Valve Configure form to "Vapor-Only"
or "Liquid-Only". With the default value ("Default"), the
calculations are based on the actual phases present. Phases for the
outlet conditions are determined by ValidPhases, regardless of the
value of PresFlowCalcBasis.

Resizing an Undersized Value

In Aspen Plus, when the valve design option is selected, with
either the outlet pressure or pressure drop specified, choking flow
can occur. When choking is predicted, the design method ignores
the effect of choking, resulting in an under-estimate of the valve %
opening.
When the Aspen Plus simulation is exported in Pressure Driven
mode into Aspen Dynamics, the flow will not match that in the
steady state simulation, and the simulation may fail to initialize.
This is because the Aspen Dynamics Valve model accounts for the
effect of choking.
To run the simulation successfully, you must resize any valves for
which you used the design option, and choking was predicted. To
do this:
1. For each Valve block invoke the Resize script.
2. Run the simulation in Initialization mode.
3. For each Valve block invoke the Resize script again.
4. Re-run the simulation in Initialization mode.
You can now run the dynamic simulation as normal.

Reverse Flow for Valve in Dynamic Simulations

Valve is supported in reverse flow simulations. No additional
specifications are required to configure Valve for reverse flow.
However, you may set the CheckValve option on the Valve
Configure form to True, to prevent reverse flow through an
instance of Valve.
When reverse flow is enabled, flow reversal in Valve is indicated
by a negative flow rate and pressure drop. If you set the
CheckValve option to True, the valve will act as a check valve and
prevent the flow from reversing through it.
Note Though not recommended, if your flowsheet uses models
that are not supported in reverse flow simulations, together with

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Pressure Changers • 7-13

 models that do support reverse flow, the unsupported models must
be separated from the supported models by Valves with the
CheckValve option set to True. This prevents reverse flow to or
from the models that do not support it. Failure to do this will result
in your simulation being underspecified.
For more information, see Creating a Reverse Flow Simulation in
the Aspen Dynamics User Guide.

Modeling Details Full (Rigorous) Valve Model

The full (rigorous) valve model relates the pressure drop across a
control valve to the flow rate through it in terms of the inlet
conditions, a flow coefficient and a number of other parameters
related to the valve size and associated piping and fittings. The
valve outlet conditions are computed from an isenthalpic flash at
the outlet pressure. This assumes the flow process is adiabatic. The
sizing equations are taken from the Instrument Society of America
(ISA) Guidelines.

Model Equations
The flow rate through a control valve under turbulent flow
conditions is given by:
FM w = N 6 F p C v ∆Peff ρ eff (1)

where the fluid properties (effective density and molecular weight)

are evaluated based on the valve inlet conditions. The flow
coefficient C v , piping geometry factor F p , effective pressure drop
∆Peff and effective density ρ eff , depend on the valve type, size and
characteristics, the associated piping and fittings and the fluid
phase type (liquid or vapor).

Flow Coefficient
The flow coefficient is a constant of proportionality with units of
L2 that relates that pressure drop driving force across the valve to
the mass flow rate through it. The actual flow coefficient depends
on the valve opening position and is related to the maximum flow
coefficient (at 100% opening) by the valve characteristic equation.
Alternatively, the user may specify the valve C v versus percentage
opening position in a tabular form to which a cubic spline is fitted.

Piping Geometry Factor

The piping geometry factor is a correction factor for piping and
fittings (e.g. reducers) around the valve. The combined factor

7-14 • Pressure Changers Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 F p C v is the effective flow coefficient for the valve/fitting
assembly.

Effective Pressure Drop

The effective pressure drop across the valve is determined by the
actual pressure drop and the condition of the flow, either choked or
un-choked.
Choked flow is a limiting (maximum) flow rate. For fixed inlet
(upstream) conditions, choked flow is manifested by the failure of
decreasing the downstream pressure to increase the flow rate.
The calculation of the choked pressure drop is based upon ISA
guidelines and depends on the on the fluid phase type (liquid or
vapor), the valve type, size and characteristics, and associated
piping and fittings.

Effective Density
The effective density at the valve inlet is determined from the fluid
phase type For liquid (incompressible) flow the effective density is
simply the actual fluid density. For vapor (compressible) flow the
effective density depends on an expansion factor which accounts
for the change in density of the fluid as it passes from the valve
inlet to the vena contracta and for the change in area of the vena
contracta as the pressure drop is varied.

Multiphase Flow
The valve sizing equations presented by the ISA are based on
single phase liquid or vapor flows. The ISA recommend avoiding
using control valves for mixed (two- and three-) phase service if at
all possible, hence formal sizing equations are not presented for
these cases.
In Valve multi-phase situations are handled in an approximate
manner. The effective choked pressure drop in mixed phase
service is taken as the smaller of the two choked pressure drops
calculated on the basis of all liquid and all vapor phase flows. The
user may also choose the calculation basis of the choked pressure
drop. The effective density is calculated using a phase fraction-
weighted mean value of the effective liquid and vapor densities.

Cavitation Index
The cavitation index K c is a ratio of the total pressure drop across
the valve to the pressure drop from the valve inlet to the vapor
pressure, the latter representing the pressure drop across the valve

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Pressure Changers • 7-15

 at which cavitation begins.

Simple Valve Model The shortcut (simple) valve model uses the inlet conditions and a
simple sizing equation to relate the pressure drop cross the valve to
the flow rate through it:
1 2
F 2M w = C v ρ m ∆Pact (2)
2
where:
Pos MAX
Cv = Cv (3)
100
The outlet conditions are then computed from an isenthalpic flash
at the outlet pressure.
The maximum flow coefficient in (3) is fitted to match the steady
state Aspen Plus SM results of its shortcut method using a default
opening position of 50%.
These equations are used to allow Aspen Plus shortcut
(PressureChanger) valves to be exported and configured for use in
Aspen Dynamics pressure driven simulations.
Valve Dynamics Valve includes equations that model the dynamics of a valve
actuator. These equations relate the exposed valve position (i.e. the
valve position that can be manipulated, for example, by a
controller) to the actual valve position (i.e. the valve position in the
model equations) in terms of the dynamic valve position, a time
constant and the dynamic valve position first- and second-order
time derivatives.
The valve dynamics model the effect of:
1. The valve action, direct or reverse
2. First- or second-order or dynamics
3. Velocity limiting
4. Hysteresis effects caused by valve dead band

7-16 • Pressure Changers Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 Specifying the Valve Dynamics for
Valve
ValveDynamics Pos

Actual Valve
Stem
Position

The dynamics of the valve actuator can be modeled in valve. When

valve dynamics are configured, the input valve position is related
to the valve stem position taking into account the following
options:
• Direct or reverse action
• First-order, second-order, or negligible dynamic effects
• Velocity limiting (when using first- or second-order dynamics)
• Modeling of hysteresis effects caused by valve dead band

Equations for Valve When the first-order dynamics option is used, the valve stem
Dynamics response is modeled using the following first-order differential
equation:
d (Pos dyn )
Pos = Pos dyn + Tau1.
dt
Where:
Tau1 = First-order time constant
For second-order dynamics, the following second-order differential
equation is used:
d 2 (Pos dyn ) d (Pos dyn )
Pos = Tau 2 . 2
+ 2.Gamma.Tau. + Pos dyn
dt dt
StemMass
Tau =
Hookes
Where:
Pos = Exposed valve position that can be
manipulated (e.g. by a controller)

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Pressure Changers • 7-17

 Pos dyn = Dynamic valve position, related to the actual
valve stem position ( Pos stem ) by the valve
action (direct or reverse), where:
direct: Pos stem = Pos dyn

reverse: : Pos stem = 100 − Pos dyn

Gamma = Damping coefficient
Tau = Natural period
StemMass = Moving mass of valve stem
Hookes = Hooke’s law constant for spring

When velocity limiting is used, the rate of change of stem position

is clipped so that it does not exceed the maximum velocity defined
by the stroke time.

Configuring The properties for the Valve dynamics are:

Valve
Dynamics Property Description Units Valid Default
Values Value
ValveAction Valve action – Direct Direct
Reverse
Dynamics Actuator dynamics – 1st order 1st order
2nd order
None
Tau1 First-order time s 0 -> 1E4 1E-3
constant
StemMass Stem assembly mass kg or lb 1E-3 -> 1E4 1.0
Hookes Spring Hooke’s law N/m or lbf/ft 1 -> 1E10 100000
constant
Gamma Damping factor - 1E-9 -> 1E9 1.0

Continued overleaf…
StrokeTimeDo Time for full scale s 0.01 -> 1E8 1.0
down stroke
StrokeTimeUp Time for full scale s 0.01 -> 1E8 1.0
up stroke
Dband Dead band % 0 -> 100 0.0

If your process models are written to work in time units other than
hours, you will need to change the control model time units. See
Time Units in Control Models, earlier in this chapter.

7-18 • Pressure Changers Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 ValveAction for Valve_dyn
ValveAction specifies whether the valve is direct- or reverse-
acting:
If valve type is As the input signal increases
Direct the valve opens
Reverse the valve closes

Dynamics for Valve_dyn

Dynamics specifies the dynamic relationship between the input
signal and the valve stem position:
If Dynamics is The result is
Second order The valve dynamics are represented by a
second order lag between the input signal
and the valve stem position.
None There are no dynamics, the full effect of a
change in the input is immediately passed to
the output

StemMass for Valve_dyn

StemMass is the mass of the stem assembly. A greater mass results
in a slower response to input signal changes.
StemMass has no effect when Dynamics=None.

Hookes for Valve_dyn

Hookes is the Hooke’s law constant. This is the force exerted per
unit length when the valve spring is compressed. A larger value
results in a faster dynamic response to input signal changes.
Hookes has no effect when Dynamics=None.

Gamma for Valve_dyn

The damping factor Gamma determines the amount of oscillation
in the dynamics response of the stem position to the valve input.
The default value of damping factor is 1.0. This is typical, and will
give a critically damped response. A value greater than 1 gives an
overdamped response, and a value of less then 1 gives an
underdamped or oscillatory response.
Gamma has no effect when Dynamics=None.

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Pressure Changers • 7-19

 StrokeTimeDo for Valve_dyn
StrokeTimeDo is the minimum time in which the valve can move
from fully open to fully closed. The maximum rate of change in
the valve position, in %/s is then determined as 100/StrokeTime.
When Dynamics= 2nd order, the valve will never open or close
faster than this rate.
StrokeTimeDo has no effect when Dynamics=None.

DBand for Valve_dyn

DBand is the dead band for the valve expressed as a percentage of
range. When the input changes direction, it must move by an
amount equal to DBand before the valve position changes. The
following illustration shows the effect of dead band on the valve
position as the input changes.
100

Valve Closing
position

Opening

0 100
Input
signal
DBand

7-20 • Pressure Changers Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 Pipe in Dynamic Simulations
The Pipe model is a general pipe model, used to model both
pressure drop and dead-time due to flow through a pipe. It consists
of a single length of pipe with either a constant or gradually
changing diameter. By specifying various fittings, you can increase
the effective length.
The following points summarize the model and its equations:
• Supports reverse flow
• Can calculate subcritical and critical flow
• Can handle single- or two-phase flow
• Two-phase flow calculated using the friction models:
• Similar to those specified in the Aspen Plus model
• Friction model by Friedel with slip model by Rouhani
• A continuous momentum balance is performed along the length
to predict vapor and liquid velocities, including the detection of
the state of critical flow at the end of the pipe from the pressure
gradient
• Continuous phase change along the length using rigorous
flashes with heat transfer to the wall
• Vapor and liquid assumed in equilibrium
• Multiple liquid phases are treated as a single homogeneous
liquid phase except for the flash calculations
• Turbulent flow assumed
• Generalized fittings
The dynamic Pipe model supports the integrated and Constant
dP/dl solution method. The Closed-Form solution method is not
supported.
The Pipe model is found in the PressureChangers folder of the
Dynamics library.

Pressure/Flow Effects for Pipe

The dynamic Pipe model uses the same method for calculating
pressure drop as used in the steady-state simulation. Select this
method under Frictional and HoldUp Correlation on the Pipe
Methods sheet.
For the Integrate solution method, the following scheme is used:
• For flow driven simulations using liquid phase models, the
outlet pressure and flow rates are determined from the inlet

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Pressure Changers • 7-21

 conditions to the pipe and the specified pressure drop
correlation.
• For flow driven simulations using vapor phase models, the
outlet conditions cannot be determined in the same way as
liquid phase models because gases are compressible. The
scheme used is to fix the outlet pressure to the steady state
value and have a pressure change at the pipe entry. The inlet
pressure and the outlet flow rate are then determined by the
outlet pressure and the specified pressure drop correlation.
• For pressure driven simulations, the flow rate through the pipe
is determined from the pressure at each end and the specified
pressure drop correlation.
Two- and three-phase models are modeled in the same way as
vapor phase models because the possible presence of a vapor phase
means the fluid in the pipe may be compressible.
For the Constant dP/dl solution method, the outlet flow rate is
always equal to the inlet flow rate.
Reverse Flow for Pipe Pipe is supported in reverse flow simulations. No additional
in Dynamic specifications are required to configure Pipe for reverse flow.
Simulations When reverse flow is enabled, flow reversal in Pipe is indicated by
negative internal flow rates and velocities.

Note.
• In some circumstances, such as when creating a pressure relief
simulation, you may need to use the Setup button on the
Configure form to initialize an instance of Pipe. The Setup
procedures for Pipe are based on the assumption of forward
flow, so you should avoid using a negative pressure gradient
for the initial starting point.

• Under certain circumstances, the Pipe model could have

convergence problems during integration when the flow
becomes very close to 0. In such cases, the convergence
behavior can be significantly improved by setting the
parameter FlowRevBasis to "InletOutlet-Flow".
The PIPE model switches the differencing scheme (forward to
backward) used for evaluating the derivatives depending on
whether the flow in the pipe is forward or backward. The
parameter FlowRevBasis enables the user to influence when
this switch is made.
When FlowRevBasis is "Local-Flow" (default), the flow at a
given point is used to determine how the derivative at that
point is to be evaluated.

7-22 • Pressure Changers Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 When FlowRevBasis is "InletOutlet-Flow", the switch is made
only if the flows at the inlet and outlet of the pipe have both
become negative (reversed).

For more information, see Creating a Reverse Flow Simulation in

Chapter 3 of the Aspen Dynamics User Guide.
Specifying Pipe for For the Integrate solution method:
Dynamic Simulations • Aspen Dynamics uses a one-dimensional, first order finite
difference scheme to solve the partial differential equations for
Pipe. As with any discretization method, there is a certain
amount of error due to the finite size of each element. You can
reduce this error by increasing the number of elements in the
model. You can change the number of finite difference
elements by changing the value of Npoint on the Pipe Methods
sheet. The default value is 10.
• You can choose to model equipment heat capacity. Heat
Transfer with the Environment for the steady-state simulation
can be specified on the Thermal Specification sheet of the Pipe
Setup form.
For the Constant dP/dl solution method, no further specifications
are required for dynamic simulations.

Specifying Equipment Heat Transfer for Pipe in Dynamic

Simulations
For pipe, when using the numerical integration solution method
(Integrate), you can choose to model equipment heat capacity.
If you model equipment heat capacity, you must enter:
• Specific heat capacity
• Mass per unit length
Furthermore, if you model equipment heat capacity and you use
the Perform Energy Balance option on the Setup\Thermal
Specification sheet, then heat transfer with the environment is
included in the energy balance. For this to work, you must enter
the following information:
On the Setup\Thermal Specification sheet, enter:
• Inlet ambient temperature
• Outlet ambient temperature
• Heat transfer coefficient from the pipe wall to the environment
On the Dynamic\Equipment Heat Transfer sheet, enter:
• Heat transfer coefficient from the process fluid to the pipe wall

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Pressure Changers • 7-23

 Use the Configure form for the Pipe model to specify:
Modeling Pressure
Relief Systems with • General specifications (component list, valid phases, solution
Pipe method, dimensions, and so on)
• Fittings (the various fittings which affect the pipe length)
• Heating
• Initialization
Note The model must always be pressure driven.

Making General Specifications for the Pipe Model

To make general specifications, open the Configure form and
select the Configure tab. This table shows what you can specify:
For this option You can specify
Component List From user defined list
Valid phases Liquid
Vapor
Vapor-Liquid
Vapor-Liquid-Liquid
Model is pressure driven True
False
Solution method Const-dp-dl
Integrate
Momentum Calculation method Dynamic
Steady-State
Frictional correlation Beggs-Brill
Friedel
Holdup correlation Beggs-Brill
Rouhani
Discretization points Number
Pipe specified length Number
Is diameter constant? Yes
No
Pipe inlet diameter Number
Pipe angle Number
Pipe roughness Number
Note The model must always be pressure driven.

7-24 • Pressure Changers Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 Specifying Fittings for the Pipe Model
To configure the various fittings which affect the pipe length, open
the Configure form and select the Fittings tab. The options on this
form are similar to those available in Aspen Plus.
For this option You can specify
Are fittings required? Yes
No
Fittings connection type Flange-Welded
Screwed
Miscellaneous L/D ratio Number
specification
Number of branch tees Number
Number of butterfly valves Number
Number of large 90 degrees elbow Number
Number of gate valves Number
Number of straight tees Number
Length to diameter ratio Number

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Pressure Changers • 7-25

 Specifying Heating for the Pipe Model
To configure the heating for the pipe model, open the Configure
form and select the Heat Transfer tab. The options on this form are
similar to those available in Aspen Plus:
For this option You can specify
Thermal specification type Adiabatic
Thermal
Include ambient heat transfer? Yes
No
Include heat flux? Yes
No
Heat flux Number
Overall heat transfer coefficient Number
Inlet ambient temperature Number
Outlet ambient temperature Number
Required duty for each segment Array of numbers
Initializing the Pipe The following procedure assumes:
Model • You are performing Initialization runs
• You are adding the pipe to the end of a preconverged network
1. From the PressureChangers folder in the Dynamics library,
add an instance of the Pipe model to the flowsheet.
2. Connect the input and output streams using the
MaterialStream type.
3. Open the Configure form.
4. Make the general specifications for the pipe model on the
Configure tab.
5. If necessary, specify the options for heating on the Heat
Transfer tab.
6. If necessary, specify the options for fittings.
7. Click Initialize.

What Does the The Initialize buttons performs the following tasks:
Initialize Button Do? • Changes the pressure specifications by fixing the inlet and
freeing the outlet pressure
• Initializes all the flashes from the upstream unit
• Changes the initialize parameter to stage1
• Performs an initialization run
• Changes the initialize parameter to stage2

7-26 • Pressure Changers Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 • Performs an initialization run
• Changes the pressure specifications to what they were
originally
• Changes the initialization parameter to no
• Performs an initialization run
This table shows the meaning of the initialization options:

Option Description
Stage1 Assumes all flashes and flows are at inlet condition
Stage2 Assumes all flows are equal
No Normal

Displaying Results To display results for the model, open the required results form.
for the Pipe Model These forms are available for displaying results:

This form Displays Notes

Results Inlet and outlet Pressure
Overall pressure drop
Pressure drop components
Equivalent length
Total heat duty Const-dp-dl method only
PressureProfilePlot Plot of pressure vs. length along pipe Integrate method only
TempProfilePlot Plot of temperature vs. length along pipe Integrate method only
VelocityProfilePlot Plot of pressure vs. length along pipe Integrate method only
Profiles For each segment in the pipe, shows a Integrate method only
table of:
Pressures
Temperatures
Mass flows
Quality
Void fractions
Velocities
Densities
Viscosities
Surface tension
LiquidMoleFractions Table of liquid mole fractions in each Integrate method only
segment (Vapor-Liquid or Vapor-
Liquid-Liquid)
Liquid1MoleFractions Table of liquid 1 mole fractions in each Integrate method only
segment (Vapor-Liquid-Liquid)
Liquid2MoleFractions Table of liquid 2 mole fractions in each Integrate method only
segment (Vapor-Liquid-Liquid)
VaporMoleFractions Table of vapor mole fractions in each Integrate method only
segment (Vapor-Liquid or Vapor-

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Pressure Changers • 7-27

 Liquid-Liquid)

Equations for the The following equations within the Integrate method Pipe model
Pipe Model are for single-phase or homogeneous flow. The Pipe model uses
similar equations for multi-phase, separated flows, with
appropriate adaptations.

Mass Balance
∂M i ∂Fi
+ =0
∂t ∂z
M = Moles
i = Component index
t = Time
F = Molar flow rate
z = Axial position

Energy Balance
∂E ∂
+ ( FH ) − Q = 0
∂t ∂z
t = Time
F = Molar flow rate
z = Axial position
E = Energy
H = Specific enthalpy
Q = Duty

Momentum Balance

Dynamic
∂ ∂ ∂
( Mom) + ( Fm u ) + ( Ap) + FRICT + Aρg sin θ = 0
∂t ∂z ∂z

Instantaneous
∂ ∂
( Fmu ) + ( Ap) + FRICT + Aρg sin θ = 0
∂z ∂z

7-28 • Pressure Changers Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 Where:
t = Time
z = Axial position
Mom = Momentum
Fm = Mass flow rate
u = Velocity
A = Cross sectional area
p = pressure
FRICT = Momentum loss due to friction
ρ = Mass density
g = Acceleration due to gravity
θ = Angle of inclination

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Pressure Changers • 7-29

7-30 • Pressure Changers Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide
8 Stream Manipulators

This chapter describes the stream manipulators:

• Dupl
• Mult
• Selector

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Stream Manipulators • 8-1

 Dupl in Dynamic Simulations
Dupl has no dynamic features and it does not support reverse flow.
Pressure/Flow Effects For material stream duplicators the pressure of each outlet stream
for Dupl is equal to the pressure of the inlet stream. The flow rate of each
outlet stream is equal to the flow rate of the inlet stream.

Mult in Dynamic Simulations

This model has no dynamic features. It supports reverse flow.
Pressure/Flow Effects For a material stream multiplier, the pressure of the outlet stream is
for Mult equal to the pressure of the inlet stream. The flow rate of the outlet
stream is equal to the flow rate of the inlet stream multiplied by the
factor as specified in the steady-state simulation.
Reverse flow for Mult Mult is supported in reverse flow simulations. No additional
in Dynamic specifications are required to configure Mult for reverse flow.
Simulations When reverse flow is enabled, flow reversal in Mult is indicated by
negative inlet and outlet stream flow rates.
Note In forward flow, the outlet flow rate from Mult is the
product of the inlet flow rate and the specified Multiplying Factor.
When the flow through Mult reverses, the flow rate flowing
backwards through the inlet stream is the (negative) flow rate in
the outlet stream divided by the specified Multiplying Factor.
For more information, see Creating a Reverse Flow Simulation in
Chapter 3 of the Aspen Dynamics User Guide.

Selector in Dynamic Simulations

This model has no dynamic features, and does not support reverse
flow.
Pressure/Flow Effects For a material stream selector, the pressure of the outlet stream is
for Selector equal to the pressure of the inlet stream that has been selected to be
passed to the outlet stream. The flow rate of the outlet stream is
equal to the flow rate of the inlet stream that has been selected to
be passed to the outlet stream.

8-2 • Stream Manipulators Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

9 Control Models

This chapter describes the predefined control elements in Aspen

Dynamics:
Model Name Description
Comparator Calculates the difference between two input signals
Dead_time Delays a signal by a specified time
Discretize Discretizes a signal, for example, for use in simulating an
online analyzer
FeedForward Feed forward controller using both lead-lag and dead time
HiLoSelect Selects the higher or lower of two input signals
IAE Calculates the integral of the absolute value of the error
between a process variable and its desired value
ISE Calculates the integral of the squared error between a
process variable and its desired value
Lag_1 Models a first order lag between the input and output
Lead_lag Models a lead-lag element
Multiply Calculates the product of two input signals
Noise Generates a Gaussian noise signal
PID A three mode proportional integral derivative controller
using a traditional positional algorithm
PIDIncr A three mode proportional integral derivative controller
using an incremental control algorithm
PRBS Generates a pseudo-random binary signal
Ratio Calculates the ratio of two input signals
Scale Scales an input signal
SplitRange Models a split range controller
SteamPtoT Calculates steam temperature given its vapor pressure
Sum Calculates the sum of two input signals
Transform Performs a loge, square, square root or power transform
Valve_dyn Models the dynamics of a valve actuator

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Control Models • 9-1

 Time Units in Control Models
By default, the control models use time units of hours. This means
they are compatible with process models that are written to use
time units of hours, such as those in Aspen Dynamics.
You can also use the control models in a flowsheet that uses your
own models which work in different time units. To do this:
1. After instancing one or more control models, in Explorer go
to Simulation and open the AllGlobals table.
2. Change the value of GlobalTimeScalar to the number of
seconds per time unit used in your models.
The default value of 3600 is for models written in hours. If
your models are written in minutes, change the value to 60,
and if they are written in seconds, change the value to 1.
Notes:
• All process models in a flowsheet must be written to work in a
single, consistent time unit. Where possible, we recommend
you use hours for consistency with AspenTech models, such as
those in Aspen Dynamics.
• There are two settings of time units of measurement, both
available from the Run Options dialog box. These are:
• Simulation time units
• Display time units

Comparator
Input1
Output_
Input2

Comparator calculates its output as the difference of the two input

signals.
Comparator Equation The equation used in the Comparator model is:
Output_ = Input1 – Input2
Configuring Comparator has no configuration parameters.
Comparator

9-2 • Control Models Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 Dead_time

Input_ Output_

Dead_time represents a pure dead time. The output of Dead_time

element is equal to the input delayed by the time delay.
Dead_time Equation The equation used in the dead-time model is:
Output_ = Delay Input_ by DeadTime
Configuring Dead_time has the following configuration parameter:
Dead_time Parameter Description Units Valid Values Default Value
DeadTime Dead time min 0 -> 1E6 0.0

If your process models are written to work in time units other than
hours, you will need to change the control model time units. See
Time Units in Control Models, earlier in this chapter.

DeadTime for Dead_time

DeadTime specifies the delay between the input and output of
Dead_time. It has units of minutes.

Discretize
Input_ Output_

Discretize discretizes a continuous control signal. It can be used to

model the behavior of an online composition analyzer, which
updates its output at intervals.
Discretize Equations The following illustration shows the relationship between the input
and output signals:

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Control Models • 9-3

 Configuring Discretize has the following configuration parameter:
Discretize Parameter Description Units Valid Values Default Value
Interval Sample interval min 0 -> 1E6 0

If your process models are written to work in time units other than
hours, you will need to change the control model time units. See
Time Units in Control Models, earlier in this chapter.

Interval for Discretize

Interval specifies the time between successive updates to the
output value.

FeedForward

FeedForward is a generalized feed-forward controller, which uses

a combination of a lead-lag and a dead time to model the process
dynamics. It includes the following features:
• Clipping and scaling of the process value and output
• Forward and reverse action
You can supply the bias by an external connection so that
combined feed-forward/feedback control can be implemented.

9-4 • Control Models Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 This is a block diagram for FeedForward:

FeedForward The main equations for the FeedForward controller are:

Equations For Lead-Lag:
Alpha*$aux = Gain*(PVs - SPs) - aux
Output_LL = Beta*$aux + aux
For Dead Time:
Output_DT = Delay Output_LL by DeadTime
Where:
Alpha = Lag time constant
Beta = Lead time constant
Gain = Process gain
PVs = Scaled process variable
SPs = Scaled setpoint
aux = Auxiliary variable connecting the lead and
the lag
Output_LL = Output of the lead-lag
DeadTime = Dead time
Output_DT = Output of the dead-time

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Control Models • 9-5

Configuring
FeedForward The FeedForward Configure form has the following parameters:

Parameter Description Units Valid Values Default

Value
Action Controller action - Direct/Reverse Direct
SP Operator set point - -1E9 -> 1E9 0
Bias Bias - -1E9 -> 1E9 0
Gain Gain - -1E9 -> 1E9 1
Alpha Lag time constant min 0.0 ->1E6 1
Beta Lead time constant min 0.0 ->1E6 1
DeadTime Dead time min 0.0 ->1E6 0
PVClipping Clip PV - Yes/No Yes
OPClipping Clip OP - Yes/No Yes
PVMin Minimum value of PV - -1E9 -> 1E9 0
PVMax Maximum value of PV - -1E9 -> 1E9 100
OPMin Minimum value of OP - -1E9 -> 1E9 0
OPMax Maximum value of OP - -1E9 -> 1E9 100

HiLoSelect
Input 1
Output
Input 2

HiLoSelect models a high or low selector. The output is either the

larger or smaller of the two inputs, depending upon whether you
specify the high or low select option.
HiLoSelect Equations When configured as a high selector:
If Input1>Input2 then
Output_ = Input1
Else
Output_ = Input2
Endif

9-6 • Control Models Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 When configured as a low selector:
If Input1<Input2 then
Output_ = Input1
Else
Output_ = Input2
Endif
Configuring HiLoSelect has the following configuration parameter:
HiLoSelect Parameter Description Units Valid Default
Values Value
Select Select high or low input – High High
Low

Select for HiLoSelect

Select specifies whether the block is to act as a high selector or a
low selector.

IAE
Input
IAE
SP

IAE calculates the integral of the absolute value of the error

between its input and a set point value.
The model provides a time-integral performance criterion. You can
use IAE to measure how successful a control system has been in
keeping a process variable at its set point (SP) over the entire
dynamic response of a controlled process. SP can be specified
within the block or be an input from another block.
IAE Equation The equation used in the model is the standard integral of the
absolute value of the error form:
T
IAE = ∫ 0
| e(t )|. dt

Where:
e = Deviation of the variable from the desired set point
t = Time
IAE = Integral absolute error value
T = Current time

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Control Models • 9-7

 Configuring IAE IAE has the following configuration parameter:
Parameter Description Units Valid Values Default Value
SP Set point – -1E9 -> 1E9 0.0

SP for IAE
SP specifies the required value of the input variable. The IAE
element calculates its performance criterion as the integral of the
absolute difference between this required value and the input
value. SP may be specified within the IAE block, or supplied
through an input signal to the block. If SP is supplied through an
input signal, make sure you change its Spec from Fixed to Free on
the block Configure table.

ISE
Input_
ISE
SP

ISE calculates the integral of the squared error between its input
and a set point value.
The model provides a time-integral performance criterion. You can
use ISE to measure how successful a control system has been in
keeping a process variable at its set point (SP) over the entire
dynamic response of a controlled process. SP can be specified
within the block or be an input from another block.
ISE Equation The equation used in the model is the standard integral of the
absolute value of the error form:
T
ISE = ∫
0
e(t ) 2 . dt

Where:
e = Deviation of the variable from the desired set point
t = Time
ISE = Integral absolute error value
T = Current time

9-8 • Control Models Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 Configuring ISE ISE has the following configuration parameter:
Parameter Description Unit Valid Values Default Value
SP Set point – -1E9 -> 1E9 0.0

SP for ISE
SP specifies the required value of the input variable. The ISE
element calculates its performance criterion as the integral of the
squared difference between this required value and the input value.
SP may be specified within the ISE block, or supplied through an
input signal to the block. If SP is supplied through an input signal,
make sure you change its Spec from Fixed to Free on the block
Configure table.

Lag_1
Input_ Output_

Lag_1 models a first order lag between the input and output
signals.
Lag_1 Equations The Laplace domain transfer function for the first order lag is:
Gain
g (s ) =
Tau.s + 1
Where:
Gain = Steady-state gain (ultimate change in output divided by change in input)
Tau = Time constant in minutes

The model uses the following equation to implement this in the

time domain:
d (Output _)
Gain.Input _ = Tau. + Output _
dt
Configuring Lag_1 Lag_1 has the following configuration parameters:
Parameter Description Units Valid Values Default Value
Gain Steady-state gain – -1E9 -> 1E9 1.0
Tau Time constant min 0 -> 1E6 0.0

If your process models are written to work in time units other than
hours, you will need to change the control model time units. See
Time Units in Control Models, earlier in this chapter.

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Control Models • 9-9

 Gain for Lag_1
Gain specifies the steady-state gain of the first order lag. The
steady-state gain is equal to the ultimate change in the output,
divided by the change in the input.

Tau for Lag_1

Tau specifies the amount of the first order lag that is imposed upon
the input variable. Tau is equal to the time at which the output has
reached 63.2% of its final value following a step change in the
input.
The units of Tau are minutes.

Lead_lag

Input_ Output_

Lead_lag models a lead-lag element. The output is the input signal

passed through a lead-lag function.
A lead-lag consists of a first-order lead of unit gain and a first-
order lag of unit gain in series. The numerator component
introduces phase lead and the denominator component introduces
phase lag. The response of the output can span from approximate
first-order lag behavior to approximate first-order lead behavior.
Lead_lag Equations The Laplace domain transfer function for the lead-lag element is:
Beta.s + 1
g (s ) = Gain.
Alpha.s + 1
Where:
Beta = Lead time constant in minutes
Alpha = Lag time constant in minutes
Gain = Steady state gain

9-10 • Control Models Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 The model uses the following equations to implement this in the
time domain:
d (aux )
Alpha + aux = Gain.Input _ (lag component)
dt
d (aux )
Output _ = Beta + aux (lead component)
dt
Where:
aux = Signal after the lag but before the lead
Configuring Lead_lag Lead_lag has the following configuration parameters:

Property Description Units Valid Values Default Value

Gain Steady-state gain – -1E9 -> 1E9 1.0
Beta Lead time constant min 0 -> 1E6 1.0
Alpha Lag time constant min 0.01 -> 1E6 1.0

If your process models are written to work in time units other than
hours, you will need to change the control model time units. See
Time Units in Control Models, earlier in this chapter.

Gain for Lead_lag

Gain specifies the steady-state gain between the input and output.

Beta for Lead_lag

Beta specifies the amount of lead imposed upon the input variable.
The units of Beta are minutes.

Alpha for Lead_lag

Alpha specifies the amount of lag that is imposed upon the input
variable. A pure lead with no lag is physically impractical, and
may cause problems when solving the simulation. Therefore Alpha
has a lower limit of 0.01.
The units of Alpha are minutes.

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Control Models • 9-11

 Multiply
Input1
Output_
Input2

Multiply evaluates its output as the product of the two input

signals.
Multiply Equations The equation used in the Multiply model is:
Output _ = Input 1.Input 2

Configuring Multiply Multiply has no configuration parameters

Noise

Input_ Output_

Noise generates a Gaussian noise signal. You can use the Noise
model in two ways:
• To add noise to the input signal
• To generate a noisy signal
Noise can be used for testing how well your control system rejects
noise.

Noise Equations The Noise model generates a random value with amplitude that
follows a Gaussian probability distribution. The mean of the noise
is zero, and the magnitude of the noise is determined by the
specified standard deviation. The output of this model is the sum
of the input to the model plus the noise.
The model approximates Gaussian white noise, which is often a
good representation of noise found in process measurement and
control systems.

9-12 • Control Models Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 The following graph shows the shape of the Gaussian distribution.

Probability

−3σ −2σ −σ 0 σ 2σ 3σ

Amplitude
σ = Standard deviation

Configuring Noise To add noise to an input signal, connect to both the Input_ and
Output_ connections. To generate a noisy signal, connect Output_
only, and Fix Input_ to the required mean value of the noisy signal.
Noise has the following configuration parameters:
Property Description Units Valid values Default Value
StdDev Standard deviation – -1E9->1E9 0.0

StdDev for Noise

StdDev specifies the standard deviation for the Gaussian
distribution of the amplitude of the noise.

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Control Models • 9-13

 PID

SPRemote

PV OP

PID models a proportional integral derivative controller using a

traditional positional algorithm. Key features of PID include:
• Ideal, series, and parallel algorithms
• Auto, manual, and cascade operation
• Optional bumpless transfer between auto and manual modes
• Optional anti-reset windup
• Various input filtering options
• Dead banding
You can control which of the three controller modes (Proportional,
Integral and Differential) by using appropriate values of the tuning
constants, for example:

To simulate this Use this value for the tuning

controller type constant
Proportional (P) Gain > 0.0, Integral time > 0.0,
Derivative time = 0.0
Proportional Integral (PI) Integral time - as required
Derivative time = 0.0
Proportional Integral Derivative Integral time – as required
(PID) Derivative time – as required

PIDIncr and PID

PIDIncr and PID are both models of PID controllers. They have
similar features but are implemented differently. PID uses a
positional algorithm to calculate the controller output from the
current error and accumulated integral error. PIDIncr uses an
incremental algorithm which calculates the change in the output as
a function of the error.
The implementation of PIDIncr is closer to that of real industrial
controllers, and it models their detailed behavior more closely. In

9-14 • Control Models Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 particular there is no bump in the output when you change the
tuning parameters during a dynamic simulation, whereas PID may
give a bump in the output. This make PIDIncr better for tuning
controllers as a simulation runs.
We recommend the use of PIDIncr for most simulations. PID is
retained for backwards compatibility of existing simulations. If
you wish to use PIDIncr in simulations which previously used PID,
you can drag and drop PIDIncr from Simulation Explorer on to an
existing controller and select yes to use PIDIncr in place of PID.
The controller settings will be automatically mapped across.

Configuring PID
Use the Configure form to enter parameters for PID.

The form is divided into four tabs for configuring different aspects
of the controller. Each of these is explained below. You will need
to change values on the Tuning and Ranges tab, but the default
values on the Filtering and Other tab are suitable for most
applications.
To help you configure the controller, ensure that you have
connected the Process Variable (PV) and output (OP) connections,
and then use the Initialize Values button on the Configure form.

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Control Models • 9-15

 When you click the button, the current values of the measured
variable and manipulated variable are used to initialize controller
parameters as follows:

Name Initialized to
Operator set point Measured Variable
Bias Manipulated Variable
PV range minimum If Measured Variable > 0 0
If Measured Variable < 0 2 x Measured Variable
PV range maximum If Measured Variable > 0 2 x Measured variable
If Measured Variable < 0 0
Output range If Manipulated Variable > 0 0
maximum If Manipulated Variable < 0 2 x Manipulated
Variable
Output range If Manipulated Variable > 0 2 x Manipulated
minimum Variable
If Manipulated Variable < 0 0
If your process models are written to work in time units other than
hours, you will need to change the control model time units. See
Time Units in Control Models, earlier in this chapter.

PID Tuning Tab

The PID tuning tab has these configuration parameters:

Description Name Units Valid values Default Value

Operator set point SPo – -1E9 -> 1E9 50
Bias Bias – -1E9 -> 1E9 0
Gain Gain – -1E9 -> 1E9 1
Integral time IntegralTime min 1E-3 -> 1E12 20
Derivative time DerivTime min 0 -> 1E6 0
Controller action Action – Direct Direct
Reverse

9-16 • Control Models Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 Operator Set Point
Operator set point (SPo) is used when the controller is in auto
mode. When the controller is in Cascade mode, the remote set
point is used instead.

Bias for PID

The bias is a constant term added to the controller output. Bias is
typically set to the value of the manipulated variable when the
process is at steady state.Gain for PID
Gain is the proportional gain of the controller. Gain is
dimensionless. Gain is related to the proportional band for the
controller as follows:
Gain = 100% / Proportional band

Integral Time for PID

The Integral Time of the controller is also known as reset time. It
has units of time/repeat.

Derivative Time for PID

The controller's derivative time is also known as rate time. It has
units of time.

Action for PID

Controller action determines whether the controller is direct or
reverse acting. The following table shows the effects of direct or
reverse action:

When the And the measured Then the manipulated

action is variable variable is
Direct Increases Increased
Direct Decreases Decreased
Reverse Increases Decreased
Reverse Decreases Increased

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Control Models • 9-17

 PID Ranges Tab
The PID Ranges tab has these configuration parameters:

Description Name Units Valid values Default

Value
Process Variable PVmin – -1E9 -> 1E9 0
Range minimum
Process Variable PVmax – -1E9 -> 1E9 100
Range maximum
Process Variable PVClipping – Yes Yes
Clip to Range No
Output Range OPmin – -1E9 -> 1E9 0
minimum
Output Range OPmax – -1E9 -> 1E9 100
maximum
Output Clip to OPClipping – Yes Yes
Range No

PVmin, PVmax, and PVClipping for PID

Process Variable Range minimum (Pvmin) and Process Variable
Range maximum (Pvmax) represent the range over which the
process variable (PV) can vary, and may correspond to the range
of the instrument used to measure the PV.
PVmin and PVmax are used to determine the scaled process
variable (PVs) as follows:
PV − PV min
PVs = 100.
PV max − PV min

PVs has units of %. It is clipped between 0 and 100%.

PVs is used in the controller equations.
If Process Variable Clip to Range is selected, PV is clipped
between PVmin and PVmax.

OPmin, OPmax, and OPClipping for PID

Output Range minimum (Opmin) and Output Range maximum
(Opmax) represent the range over which the output (OP) can vary,
and usually correspond to the range of the final control element to
which the controller output is connected. If the final control
element is a valve, OPmin and OPmax are usually 0 and 100
respectively.

9-18 • Control Models Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 OPmin and OPmax are used to determine the actual controller
output (OP) for the scaled controller output (OPs) as follows:
OPs.(OP max − OP min)
OP = + OP min
100
OPs has units of %. OPs is used in the controller equations.
If Output Clip to Range is selected, then OP is clipped between
OPmin and OPmax.

PID Filtering Tab

The PID Filtering tab has these configuration parameters:

Description Name Units Valid values Default

Value
Enable filtering PVFiltering – Yes No
No
Filter time PVFilter min 1E-3 -> 1E6 1
constant
Proportional term Beta – 0 -> 1 1.0
SP change filter
Derivative term Alpha – 0.03 -> 1 0.1
filter constant
Derivative term SP Gamma – 0 -> 1 1
change filter

Enable Filtering and Filter time constant for PID

If Enable filtering (PVFiltering) is selected, the process variable
value (PV) will be passed through a first order filter before being
used in the controller equations. This feature is used in real
controllers to help smooth a noisy measurement.

Filter time constant (PVFilter) has units of time.

In the Laplace domain the filter equation is:

1
g (s ) =
PVFilter .s + 1

Derivative term filter constant for PID

This is the derivative term filter constant (Alpha). To avoid
excessive response to rapid changes in error, the error term is
passed through a first-order filter before it is used to calculate the
derivative term. The time constant for this filter is the product of
Alpha and the derivative time.

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Control Models • 9-19

 In the Laplace domain the filter equation is:
1
g (s ) =
(Alpha.DerivTime ).s + 1
Alpha can be set to any value between 0.03 and 1.0. Normal
settings are between 0.1 to 0.125. Increasing Alpha reduces the
effect of the derivative term.

Proportional Term SP Change filter for PID

The proportional term SP change filter constant (Beta) determines
how the proportional action of the controller is affected by set
point changes:

If Beta is The result is

1.0 The proportional action of the controller is the standard
error signal (default)
< 1.0 The amount of controller output from the controller for set
point changes is limited
0 The proportional action acts only on process variable
movement. This enables smooth integrated response to set
point changes and fast response to disturbances.
The error used in calculating the proportional term is related to
Beta as follows:
Ep = Beta.SP - PV
Where:
Ep = Proportional error
SP = Set point
PV = Process variable

Derivative term SP Change Filter

The derivative term SP change filter (Gamma) determines how the
derivative action of the controller is affected by set point changes:

If Gamma is The result is

1.0 The derivative action works in the same way on both set
point and disturbance changes (default)
< 1.0 The derivative action from the controller for set point
changes is limited
0 The derivative action works only on the process variable
signal. Derivative action that works on the set point is
usually not a problem except in cascade loops or other
cases in which the set point is manipulated. Derivative

9-20 • Control Models Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 action may become excessive due to abrupt changes in the
set point.

The error used in calculating the derivative term is related to

Gamma as follows:
Ed = Gamma.SP - PV
Where:
Ed = Derivative error
SP = Set point
PV = Process variable

PID Other Tab

The PID Other tab has these configuration parameters:

Description Name Units Valid values Default Value

Controller Algorithm – Ideal Ideal
algorithm Parallel
Series
Bumpless Bumpless – Yes Yes
auto/manual No
transfer
Anti-reset windup ARWindup – Yes Yes
No
Range below set DBlo % 0 -> 100 0
point
Range above set DBhi % 0 -> 100 0
point

Algorithm for PID

Commercial PID controllers typically use one of three alternative
algorithms. These algorithms are:
• Ideal This is the classical form normally found in text books.
• Series This is also known as the interacting or analog
algorithm.
• Parallel This is also known as the ideal parallel or
non-interacting algorithm.

Anti Reset Windup for PID

Anti reset windup determines whether the controller anti-reset
windup algorithm is active.

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Control Models • 9-21

 What is Reset Windup?
The integral term of a proportional integral derivative controller
causes its output to continue changing as long as there is a
non-zero error. If the error cannot be eliminated quickly, then
eventually the integral term saturates the control action (the valve
is completely open or shut). Then, even if the error returns to zero,
the control action may remain saturated. This phenomenon is
called reset windup or integral windup.
The integral mode of the controller does not reverse the direction
of the controller output until the measurement crosses the set point.
Proportional action, on the other hand, reverses the direction of the
controller output when the controller input reverses:
Proportional error = SP − PV
Integral error = ∫ (SP − PV ) . dT
Where:
SP = Set point
PV = The measured process variable

Reset Windup Example

The following graph shows what happens to the proportional and
integral error term of a controller with and without anti-reset
windup.

Integral error without

anti-reset windup

Integral error with anti-

reset windup

Manipulated variable

Proportional error

For a controller with anti-reset windup, when the manipulated

variable is at its minimum value of 10, the anti-reset windup
mechanism prevents the integral error from increasing further.

9-22 • Control Models Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 For a controller without anti-reset windup, the integral error term
continues to increase. When the manipulated variable comes off
the minimum at time=15, the proportional error term decreases,
while the integral term continues to increase. The controller has to
pull back the extra amount that the integral term has wound up
while the manipulated variable has saturated at its minimum.

Bumpless for PID

Bumpless determines whether the bumpless transfer option is
active. If bumpless transfer is active, the controller avoids a bump
in its output when you switch between auto and manual modes.

This is achieved as follows:

When switching The effect is

from
Auto to manual The output is frozen at the value it was when the
controller was switched to manual mode. The output
will change only when you enter a new value for the
controller output.
Manual to auto The set point is set to the value of the measured
mode variable when the controller was switched to auto
mode. The set point will change only when you
supply a new value.

DBlo and DBhi for PID

Sometimes you may wish to specify a dead band either side of the
controller set point. If the process variable is within this dead band,
the controller output is not changed. Specify the lower (Dblo) and
upper (Dbhi) limits to specify the lower and upper limits of this
dead band as a percentage of the process variable range (PVmax–
PVmin).

If DBlo and DBhi are The result is

0.0 No dead band is active (default)
>0.0 Dead band is active within the ranges specified
PID Algorithms The equations used in the PID model to describe controller output
depend on the algorithm you choose:
• Ideal algorithm
• Series algorithm
• Parallel algorithm

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Control Models • 9-23

 Ideal Algorithm
The equation used to determine the controller output (OP) is:
 1 d (E D ) 
OP = Bias + Gain ∗ E P +
 IntegralTi me ∫ E I .dt + DerivTime
dt 


9-24 • Control Models Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 Where:
EP = Proportional mode error
EI = Integral mode error
ED = Derivative mode error
All of these errors are derived from the standard error (E), which is
defined as:
E = set point – process variable

Series Algorithm
The equation used to determine the controller output (OP) is:
 1  d (E D ) 
OP = Bias + Gain.E P +
 IntegralTi me ∫ E I .dt .1 + DerivTime
 dt 


Parallel Algorithm
The equation used to determine the controller output (OP) is:
1 d (E D )
OP = Bias + Gain.E P +
IntegralTime ∫ E I .dt + DerivTime
dt

Note. All values of the variables used in these equations are the
scaled values based on the process variable range minimum and
maximum or the output range minimum and maximum.

PID Controller The PID model includes two controller faceplates that you can use
Faceplates to interact with the controller during a running simulation:
• Full faceplate
• Compact faceplate
The full faceplate is similar to that found on real PID controllers. It
includes three horizontal bars which show the set point (SP),
process variable (PV), and output (OP) as a percentage of range.
To the right are the actual numerical values of SP, PV, and OP in
process units.

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Control Models • 9-25

 The first three buttons at the top level enable you to switch
between auto, manual, and cascade modes respectively. When you
are in auto mode (as in the example), the value for SP has a white
background, which means you can type a new value. When you are
in manual mode, the value for OP has a white background, which
means you can change the value.
Pressing the fourth button from the left opens the Configure table
so that you can easily change configuration parameters.
The fifth button opens the plot for the controller which shows
values of SP, PV and OP either in process units, or as a percentage
of the range versus time. The sixth button plots the same variables
but shows them as percentages of range, instead of in process
units.
The compact faceplate shows a subset of the information found on
the full faceplate.

Closed-Loop The Ziegler-Nichols closed-loop technique is one of the most

Controller Tuning popular methods for tuning controllers. This technique gives
using the Ziegler- approximate values of the controller's gain, integral time, and
Nichols Technique derivative time required to obtain a one quarter amplitude
response.
The Ziegler-Nichols closed-loop method is suitable for many
single-loop controllers. For processes that contain interacting
loops, open-loop tuning methods are preferred. For more
information on open-loop tuning, please consult a text book on
controller tuning.

Using the Ziegler-Nichols Technique

1. To use the Ziegler-Nichols technique:
2. With the controller in automatic, remove all the reset and
derivative action. To do this, set:
Integral time to 1.0E6
Derivative time to 0.0
3. Make a small set point or load change and observe the
response.
4. If the response is not continuously oscillatory, increase the
controller's gain and repeat step 2.

9-26 • Control Models Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 5. Repeat step 3 until you obtain a continuous oscillatory
response.
The gain that gives these continuous oscillations is called the
ultimate gain, KU . The period of the oscillations is called the
ultimate period, TU .

Obtaining the Approximate Decay Ratio Settings

Use the following expressions to calculate the controller settings
from the ultimate gain KU . and the ultimate period TU .
Controller Type Gain Integral Time Derivative Time
P 0.5 K u le6 0
PI 0.45 K u Tu / 1.2 0
PID 0.6 K u Tu / 2 Tu / 8

Using the ISE and IAE The ISE model and IAE model can be used to give a measure of
Models with a PID how successful a control system is at keeping a process variable
Controller (PV) at its set point (SP). When used with a PID controller, it is
convenient to link the input of the ISE and IAE models directly to
the setpoint and process variable of the controller. For this reason,
the PID setpoint (SP) and process variable (PV) are defined as
output control connections, and you can use control streams to
connect the PID controller and ISE or IAE block, as in the
following table:
Connect this PID controller: To this connection of
the ISE or IAE block:
SP SP
PV Input_

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Control Models • 9-27

 PIDIncr

SPRemote

PV OP

PIDIncr models a proportional integral derivative controller using

an incremental control algorithm, as used in most modern
electronic controllers. Key features of PIDIncr include:
• Ideal, series, and parallel algorithms
• Auto, manual, and cascade operation
• Optional tracking of the process variable by the set point when
in manual mode
• Anti-reset windup
• Various input filtering options
• Dead banding
• Auto-tuning capability
You can control which of the three controller modes (Proportional,
Integral and Differential) by using appropriate values of the tuning
constants, for example:

To simulate this Use this value for the tuning constant

controller type
Proportional (P) Integral time – very large e.g. 1e6
Derivative time = 0.0
Proportional Integral (PI) Integral time - as required
Derivative time = 0.0
Proportional Integral Integral time – as required
Derivative (PID) Derivative time – as required

PIDIncr and PID

PIDIncr and PID are both models of PID controllers. They have
similar features but are implemented differently. PID uses a
positional algorithm to calculate the controller output from the
current error and accumulated integral error. PIDIncr uses an
incremental algorithm which calculates the change in the output as
a function of the error.

9-28 • Control Models Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 The implementation of PIDIncr is closer to that of real industrial
controllers, and it models their detailed behavior more closely. In
particular there is no bump in the output when you change the
tuning parameters during a dynamic simulation, whereas PID may
give a bump in the output. This make PIDIncr better for tuning
controllers as a simulation runs.
We recommend the use of PIDIncr for most simulations. PID is
retained for backwards compatibility of existing simulations. If
you wish to use PIDIncr in simulations which previously used PID,
you can drag and drop PIDIncr from Simulation Explorer on to an
existing controller and select yes to use PIDIncr in place of PID.
The controller settings will be automatically mapped across.

Configuring PIDIncr
Use the Configure form to enter parameters for PID.

The form is divided into four tabs for configuring different aspects
of the controller. Each of these is explained below. You will need
to change values on the Tuning and Ranges tab, but the default
values on the Filtering and Other tab are suitable for most
applications.
To help you configure the controller, ensure that you have
connected the process variable (PV) and output (OP) connections,
and then use the Initialize Values button on the Configure form.

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Control Models • 9-29

 When you click the button, the current values of the measured
variable and manipulated variable are used to initialize controller
parameters as follows:

Parameter Initialized to
Set point Measured Variable
Initial Output Manipulated Variable
PV range minimum If Measured Variable > 0 0
If Measured Variable < 0 2 x Measured Variable
PV range maximum If Measured Variable > 0 2 x Measured variable
If Measured Variable < 0 0
Output range If Manipulated Variable > 0 0
maximum If Manipulated Variable < 0 2 x Manipulated
Variable
Output range If Manipulated Variable > 0 2 x Manipulated
minimum Variable
If Manipulated Variable < 0 0
If your process models are written to work in time units other than
hours, you will need to change the control model time units. See
Time Units in Control Models, earlier in this chapter.

PIDIncr Tuning Tab

The PID tuning tab has these configuration parameters:

Description Name Units Valid values Default Value

Set point SP, SPo – -1E9 -> 1E9 50
Initial output OPMan -- -1E9 -> 1E9 50
Gain Gain – -1E9 -> 1E9 1
Integral time IntegralTime min 1E-3 -> 1E12 20
Derivative time DerivTime min 0 -> 1E6 0
Controller action Action – Direct Direct
Reverse

Set Point for PIDIncr

The set point is used when the controller is in auto mode. When
the controller is in Cascade mode, the remote set point is used
instead. Use this to change the set point before a simulation, or
when a dynamic simulation is paused. If you wish to change the
value while a dynamic simulation is running you should change
the value from the controller faceplate.

9-30 • Control Models Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 Initial Output for PIDIncr
Because PIDIncr uses an incremental algorithm the value of the
output at the start of a dynamic simulation must be defined. If you
have previously performed a steady state simulation this will
already be at the steady state value and you will probably want to
leave it unchanged. If you have not performed a steady state run
you should normally specify the initial value.

Gain for PIDIncr

Gain is the proportional gain of the controller. Gain is
dimensionless. Some people use the term Proportional Band, and
this is related to gain by the equation:
Gain = 100% / Proportional Band

Integral Time for PIDIncr

The Integral Time of the controller is also known as reset time. It
has units of time/repeat.

Derivative Time for PIDIncr

The controller's derivative time is also known as rate time. It has
units of time.

Action for PIDIncr

Controller action determines whether the controller is direct or
reverse acting. The following table shows the effects of direct or
reverse action:

When the And the measured Then the manipulated

action is variable variable is
Direct Increases Increased
Direct Decreases Decreased
Reverse Increases Decreased
Reverse Decreases Increased

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Control Models • 9-31

 PIDIncr Ranges Tab
The PID Ranges tab has these configuration parameters:

Description Parameter Units Valid values Default

Value
Process variable PVmin – -1E9 -> 1E9 0
and set point,
Range minimum
Process variable PVmax – -1E9 -> 1E9 100
and set point,
Range maximum
Process variable PVClipping – Yes Yes
and set point, Clip No
PV to Range
Process variable SPClipping – Yes Yes
and set point, Clip No
SP to Range
Output, Range OPmin – -1E9 -> 1E9 0
minimum
Output, Range OPmax – -1E9 -> 1E9 100
maximum
Output, Clip to OPClipping – Yes Yes
Range No

PVmin, PVmax, PVClipping and SPClipping for PIDIncr

Process Variable Range minimum (PVmin) and Process Variable
Range maximum (PVmax) represent the range over which the
process variable (PV) can vary, and may correspond to the range
of the instrument used to measure the PV.
PVmin and PVmax are used to determine the scaled process
variable (PVs) as follows:
PV − PV min
PVs = 100.
PV max − PV min

PVs has units of %.

PVs is used in the controller equations.
If Clip PV to Range is selected, the value of PV used in the
controller equations is clipped between PVmin and PVmax, which
means PVs is always between 0 and 100%.
If Clip SP to range is selected, the value of SP used in the
controller equations is clipped between PVmin and PVmax.

9-32 • Control Models Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 OPmin, OPmax, and OPClipping for PIDIncr
Output Range minimum (OPmin) and Output Range maximum
(OPmax) represent the range over which the output (OP) can vary,
and usually correspond to the range of the final control element to
which the controller output is connected. If the final control
element is a valve, OPmin and OPmax are usually 0 and 100
respectively.
OPmin and OPmax are used to determine the actual controller
output (OP) for the scaled controller output (OPs) as follows:
OPs.(OP max − OP min)
OP = + OP min
100
OPs has units of %. OPs is used in the controller equations.
If Output Clip to range is selected, then OP is clipped between
OPmin and OPmax.

PIDIncr Filtering Tab

The PID Filtering tab has these configuration parameters:

Description Parameter Units Valid values Default

Value
Filter time PVFilter min 1E-3 -> 1E6 0.0333
constant
Proportional term Beta – 0 -> 1 1.0
SP change filter
Derivative term Alpha – 0.03 -> 1 0.1
filter constant
Derivative term SP Gamma – 0 -> 1 1
change filter

Filter time constant for PIDIncr

The process variable value (PV) is passed through a first order
filter before being used in the controller equations. This feature is
used in real controllers to help smooth a noisy measurement.

Filter time constant (PVFilter) has units of time. The default value
is 0.0333 minutes, which is 2 seconds.

In the Laplace domain the filter equation is:

1
g (s ) =
PVFilter .s + 1

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Control Models • 9-33

 Derivative term filter constant for PIDIncr
This is the derivative term filter constant (Alpha). To avoid
excessive response to rapid changes in error, the error term is
passed through a first-order filter before it is used to calculate the
derivative term. The time constant for this filter is the product of
Alpha and the derivative time.
In the Laplace domain the filter equation is:
1
g (s ) =
(Alpha.DerivTime ).s + 1
Alpha can be set to any value between 0.03 and 1.0. Normal
settings are between 0.1 to 0.125. Increasing Alpha reduces the
effect of the derivative term.

Proportional Term SP Change filter for PIDIncr

The proportional term SP change filter constant (Beta) determines
how the proportional action of the controller is affected by set
point changes:

If Beta is The result is

1.0 The proportional action of the controller is the standard
error signal (default)
< 1.0 The amount of controller output from the controller for set
point changes is limited
0 The proportional action acts only on process variable
movement. This enables smooth integrated response to set
point changes and fast response to disturbances.
The error used in calculating the proportional term is related to
Beta as follows:
dEp = Beta.dSP - dPV
Where:
dEp = Rate of change of proportional error
dSP = Rate of change of set point
dPV = Rate of change of process variable

9-34 • Control Models Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 Derivative term SP Change Filter
The derivative term SP change filter (Gamma) determines how the
derivative action of the controller is affected by set point changes:

If Gamma is The result is

1.0 The derivative action works in the same way on both set
point and disturbance changes (default)
< 1.0 The derivative action from the controller for set point
changes is limited
0 The derivative action works only on the process variable
signal. Derivative action that works on the set point is
usually not a problem except in cascade loops or other
cases in which the set point is manipulated. Derivative
action may become excessive due to abrupt changes in the
set point.

The error used in calculating the derivative term is related to

Gamma as follows:
dEd = Gamma,dSP - dPV
Where:
dEd = Rate of change of derivative error
dSP = Rate of change of set point
dPV = Rate of change of process variable

PIDIncr Other Tab

The PIDIncr Other tab has these configuration parameters:

Description Parameter Units Valid values Default Value

Controller Algorithm – Ideal Ideal
algorithm Parallel
Series
SP tracks PV PVTrack – Yes Yes
when in manual No
Range above set DBhi % 0 -> 100 0
point
Range below set DBlo % 0 -> 100 0
point

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Control Models • 9-35

 Algorithm for PIDIncr
Commercial PID controllers typically use one of three alternative
algorithms. These algorithms are:
• Ideal This is the classical form normally found in text books.
• Series This is also known as the interacting or analog
algorithm.
• Parallel This is also known as the ideal parallel or
non-interacting algorithm.

PVTrack for PIDIncr

PVTrack determines whether the set point tracks (in other words
follows) the process variable when the controller is in manual.
This is a common feature of industrial controllers. It means that
when you switch back from manual to auto, the controller will
attempt to keep the process variable at the value it had when the
switch was made.
If PVTrack is set to no the set point remains constant when in
manual mode.

DBlo and DBhi for PIDIncr

Sometimes you may wish to specify a dead band either side of the
controller set point. If the process variable is within this dead band,
the controller output is not changed. Specify the lower (DBlow)
and upper (DBhi) limits to specify the lower and upper limits of
this dead band as a percentage of the process variable range
(PVmax–PVmin).

If DBlow and DBhi are The result is

0.0 No dead band is active (default)
>0.0 Dead band is active within the ranges specified
PID Algorithms The equations used in the PIDIncr model to describe controller
output depend on the algorithm you choose:
• Ideal algorithm
• Series algorithm
• Parallel algorithm

Ideal Algorithm
The equation used to determine the controller output (OP) is:
 1 d (E D ) 
OP = Bias + Gain ∗ E P +
 IntegralTi me ∫ E I .dt + DerivTime
dt 


9-36 • Control Models Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 Where:
EP = Proportional mode error
EI = Integral mode error
ED = Derivative mode error
All of these errors are derived from the standard error (E), which is
defined as:
E = set point – process variable

Series Algorithm
The equation used to determine the controller output (OP) is:
 1  d (E D ) 
OP = Bias + Gain.E P +
 IntegralTi me ∫ E I .dt .1 + DerivTime
 dt 


Parallel Algorithm
The equation used to determine the controller output (OP) is:
1 d (E D )
OP = Bias + Gain.E P +
IntegralTime ∫ E I .dt + DerivTime
dt

Note. All values of the variables used in these equations are the
scaled values based on the process variable range minimum and
maximum or the output range minimum and maximum.

Anti Reset Windup In common with modern industrial controllers, PIDIncr

implements anti reset windup. This section explains what anti reset
windup is.
The integral term of a controller causes its output to continue
changing as long as there is a non-zero error. If the error cannot be
eliminated quickly, then eventually the integral term saturates the
control action (the valve is completely open or shut). Then, even if
the error returns to zero, the control action may remain saturated.
This phenomenon is called reset windup or integral windup.
The integral mode of the controller does not reverse the direction
of the controller output until the measurement crosses the set point.
Proportional action, on the other hand, reverses the direction of the
controller output when the controller input reverses:
Proportional error = SP − PV
Integral error = ∫ (SP − PV ) . dT
Where:

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Control Models • 9-37

 SP = Set point
PV = The measured process variable

Reset Windup Example

The following graph shows what happens to the proportional and
integral error term of a controller with and without anti-reset
windup.

Integral error without

anti-reset windup

Integral error with anti-

reset windup

Manipulated variable

Proportional error

For a controller with anti-reset windup, when the manipulated

variable is at its minimum value of 10, the anti-reset windup
mechanism prevents the integral error from increasing further.
For a controller without anti-reset windup, the integral error term
continues to increase. When the manipulated variable comes off
the minimum at time=15, the proportional error term decreases,
while the integral term continues to increase. The controller has to
pull back the extra amount that the integral term has wound up
while the manipulated variable has saturated at its minimum.

PIDIncr Controller The PID model includes two controller faceplates that you can use
Faceplates to interact with the controller during a running simulation:
• Full faceplate
• Compact faceplate
The full faceplate is similar to that found on real PID controllers. It
includes three horizontal bars which show the set point (SP),
process variable (PV), and output (OP) as a percentage of range.
To the right are the actual numerical values of SP, PV, and OP in
process units.

9-38 • Control Models Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 The first three buttons at the top level enable you to switch
between auto, manual, and cascade modes respectively. When you
are in auto mode (as in the example), the value for SP has a white
background, which means you can type a new value. When you are
in manual mode, the value for OP has a white background, which
means you can change the value.
The fourth button enables you to switch between viewing values in
process units or percentages of range. To see the process units you
can hold the mouse pointer over the label SP, PV or OP.

To individually switch viewing of SP, PV or OP between

percentage and process units right mouse click on the label and
select as required.

Pressing the fifth button opens the Configure form so that you can
easily change configuration parameters.
The sixth button opens the plot for the controller which shows
values of SP, PV and OP either in process units, or as a percentage
of the range, versus time.
The seventh button opens the Tune form which you can use to
automatically determine tuning parameters for the controller.
To save space the compact faceplate only includes the three
buttons required to change controller mode, and does not include
bars to represent values. Otherwise the behavior is the same as for
the main faceplate.

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Control Models • 9-39

Automatic Controller The PIDIncr Tune form provides access to automatic tuning
Tuning Context capabilities which you can use to determine suitable values for the
controller tuning parameters. This technique is useful when
designing control systems for new processes or improving those
for existing processes.

Note. To obtain good results that can be transferred to a real

control system it is important that you accurately model the loop
dynamics. This means modeling the sensor and actuator dynamics
if they have a significant effect on the overall loop dynamics. It is
particularly important to model and dead times in the control loop.

Using Automatic Before using automatic tuning ensure that the controller Process
Controller Tuning Variable and Output connections are in place. Also ensure that you
have entered the controller input and output ranges and the Set
Point. If you use the Closed Loop ATV test method you must also
have entered the correct controller action.
Next choose your required test method and test settings.
Start a dynamic simulation and open the controller faceplate. Wait
until the controller PV and OP are stable. This is easiest to see if
you plot the values using the plot button. Then press the Start test
button to start the test.
When the test has run press the Finish Test button. For an Open
loop test this is when the PV has stopped changing significantly.
For a closed loop ATV test this is when each cycle looks the same
as the previous one.
The test results will then be calculated and displayed
automatically.

For step tests, in some cases the automatic tuner may find it
difficult to estimate the Time constant and Dead time from the test
results. This can be true if you are using the Discretize model to
simulate the effect of an analyzer in the control loop. For this
reason we recommend you visually check that the values shown
look reasonable. The diagram below shows how the values can be
determined from the step response curve.

9-40 • Control Models Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 55 65

54
62.
5
53

52 60

Controller Output
Process Variable
Set Point
51 57.
5
50
55
49

48 52.
5 Dead time Time constant
47
50
46

45
0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 6 6.5 7
Time Hours

If you would like to change the values used for the calculation of
the tuning parameters type in the values you want to use in place
of those determined by the automatic tuner.
If for any reason you wish to stop a test without calculating the
results press the Cancel test button to abort the test.
To calculate tuning parameters select the Tuning parameters tab.
Select the tuning parameter options and press the Calculate button
to calculate the results. If you wish to update the controller with
the calculated values click the Update controller button.
Tip:
• If your control loop has very fast dynamics, or if you are using
Closed Loop ATV testing on a loop with a very small dead
time, you may need to reduce the Simulation Communication
Interval to ensure that the fast changes in the PV are
adequately captured. You can do this on the Run Options
dialog in the section Time control. You may also need to
reduce the integrator minimum step size. Do this on the
Integrator tab of the Solver Options dialog.

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Control Models • 9-41

 • If you rewind or restart your simulation after clicking the
Update controller button the controller parameters are reset to
their previous values. To prevent this click the Update
controller button after you have rewound or restarted the
simulation.
Test Method and Test You can perform either an open loop test or a closed loop ATV
Settings for PIDIncr test.
For an open loop test the controller is set to manual and the output
is stepped. You can specify whether the step is up or down, and the
size of the step as a percentage of output range. This approach
assumes that the process can be approximated by a first order lag
plus deadtime. The response of the PV is used to estimate an open
loop gain, time constant and dead time for the process.
Tip - You can try different steps directions and sizes to see how
these affect the results. The more non-linear the process the greater
the differences will be.
For a closed loop ATV test the control operates as a relay
controller to create a limit cycle in the PV. For a Direct acting
controller, when the PV is greater than the set point, the controller
moves the output to the initial output plus the relay amplitude that
you specify. When the PV is less than the set point the controller
moves the output to the initial value less the amplitude. If the
controller action is reverse this works the other way round. It is
important that you select the correct controller action before
running this test.
The size and period of the limit cycle in the PV is used to
determine the ultimate gain and ultimate period of the process.
Tip - The Closed Loop ATV test method is only effective if you
have some dead time in the control loop. If you have not modeled
loop dead time you should use the Open Loop test method.
Tuning Parameter First specify the controller type that you wish to calculate
Options for PIDIncr parameters for. This can be P, PI or PID. Then select the tuning
rule to be used. Many methods have been proposed for
determining controller tuning parameters. We have provided some
of the most commonly used methods. The methods available differ
depending upon whether you performed an open loop or closed
loop test. Some methods are not available for all controller types.

Open Loop Methods

Ziegler-Nichols – Aims to provide a quarter amplitude decay ratio,
in other words for each oscillation to be one quarter the amplitude
of the previous one

9-42 • Control Models Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 Cohen-Coon – Also aims to provide a quarter amplitude decay
ratio. Seeks to improve on Ziegler-Nichols when the dead time is
large compared to the time constant
IMC – Uses tuning rules developed by Rivera and Morari. Aims to
provide robust control with no oscillation or overshoot. Provides a
more damped response than Ziegler-Nichols and Cohen-Coon
If you select the IMC tuning rule you must enter a value for
lambda. This is a filter parameter. It must be greater than 0.2 times
the calculated process time constant. For a PI controller is must be
greater than 1.7 times the dead time, and for a PID controller it
must be greater than 0.25 times the dead time. A smaller value
gives a faster response.
IAE – Aims to minimize the integrated absolute error in the
response to a disturbance
ISE – Aims to minimize the integrated squared error in the
response to a disturbance
ITAE – Aims to minimize the integrated time waited absolute error
in the response to a disturbance

Closed Loop Methods

Ziegler-Nichols - Aims to provide a quarter amplitude decay ratio,
in other words for each oscillation to be one quarter the amplitude
of the previous one
Tyreus-Luyben – Less aggressive than Ziegler-Nichols with lower
gain and larger integral times. Minimizes overshoot. Developed
specifically for process applications.

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Control Models • 9-43

 Using the ISE and IAE The ISE model and IAE model can be used to give a measure of
Models with the how successful a control system is at keeping a process variable at
PIDIncr Controller its set point. When used with a PIDIncr controller, it is convenient
to link the input of the ISE and IAE models directly to the set point
and process variable of the controller. For this reason, the set point
(SP) and process variable (PV) are defined as output control
connections, and you can use control streams to connect the
PIDIncr controller and ISE or IAE block, as in the following table:
Connect this PIDIncr controller To this connection of
connection: the ISE or IAE block:
SP SP
PV Input_

9-44 • Control Models Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 PRBS

Output_

PRBS generates a pseudo-random binary signal. You can use the

output from the model in two ways:
• As a noise source added to a signal using the Sum model
• As the signal itself
PRBS can be used for testing how well your control system rejects
noise.
The output signal can have either a fixed or varying amplitude.
PRBS Equations PRBS can be used to generate either a noise signal with:
• Fixed amplitude
• Variable amplitude
When fixed amplitude signal is selected, the output is always the
datum plus or minus the amplitude. If a variable amplitude is
selected, the output is the datum plus or minus a random value in
the range (-amplitude) to (+amplitude). In both cases, the output
signal is re-calculated at an interval defined by the specified period
of the noise.
The following graphs show the two types of pseudo-random
signals that can be generated:
Fixed Amplitude

Upper
bound

Amplitude

Datum

Amplitude

Lower
bound

Time

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Control Models • 9-45

 Varying Amplitude

Upper
bound

Amplitude

Datum

Amplitude

Lower
bound

Time

Configuring PRBS PRBS has the following configuration parameters:

Property Description Units Valid Default

Values Value
AmplitudeType Type of amplitude – Fixed Fixed
variation Varying
Datum Datum point for – -1E9 -> 1E9 0.0
deviation
Amplitude Amplitude of deviation – 0 -> 1E9 1.0
Period Period of random change min 1E-4 -> 1E6 1.0
Seed Seed for random No. – 1000 -> 1E9 12345
generation
If your process models are written to work in time units other than
hours, you will need to change the control model time units. See
Time Units in Control Models, earlier in this chapter.

AmplitudeType for PRBS

AmplitudeType specifies the type of pseudo-random binary signal.
If AmplitudeType is The result is
Fixed Deviation around Datum is fixed at -
Amplitude or +Amplitude.
Variable Deviation around Datum can vary
between -Amplitude and +Amplitude.

9-46 • Control Models Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 Datum for PRBS
Datum specifies the fixed value around which the random
deviation occurs. For steady-state and other non-dynamic run
modes, the output from PRBS is fixed at Datum.

Amplitude for PRBS

Amplitude specifies the size of the deviation around the Datum
value.

Period for PRBS

Period specifies the period at which the random signal can change.
The units of Period are minutes.

Seed for PRBS

Seed is used to initialize the random number generator used within
PRBS. Make sure Seed is a large number, in the order of
thousands. Using the same seed will give the same random signal
for repeated runs of the simulation. To get different sequences of
random numbers, change the value of seed.

Ratio
Input1
Output_
Input2

Ratio calculates its output as the ratio of input1 to input2.

Ratio Equations The model equation calculates the ratio of the first input signal to
the second input signal:
Input 1
Output _ =
Input 2
Configuring Ratio Ratio has no configuration parameters.

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Control Models • 9-47

 Scale

Input_ Output_

Scale maps an input signal onto a scale, where a given minimum is

0% and a given maximum is 100%. The output signal can also be
clipped to remain within the range 0 to 100%.
Scale Equations Scale uses the following scaling equation:
100.(Input _ − ScaleMin )
Output _ =
ScaleMax − ScaleMin
If clipping is enabled, Output_ will never be less than 0 or greater
than 100, even if this equation calculates a value outside of this
range.
Configuring Scale Scale has the following configuration parameters:
Property Description Units Valid Default
Values Value
Clipping Output clipping – Yes No
No
ScaleMin Scale minimum – -1E9 -> 1E9 0.0
ScaleMax Scale maximum – -1E9 -> 1E9 100.0

Clipping for Scale

Output clipping determines whether or not the output of the scaler
is clipped between the values of ScaleMin and ScaleMax.
If output clipping is The result is
No No clipping (default)
Yes Output is clipped between ScaleMin and
ScaleMax

ScaleMin for Scale

ScaleMin specifies the lower limit to which the input of the scaler
is clipped if clipping is active.

ScaleMax for Scale

ScaleMax specifies the upper limit to which the input of the scaler
is clipped if clipping is active.

9-48 • Control Models Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 SplitRange
Output 1
Input_
Output 2

SplitRange Equations The following illustration shows the relationship between the input
and output signals:

In this example, the outputs have the following actions:

Output Action Meaning
1 Direct Increases as the input increases
2 Reverse Decreases as the input increases
The plot shows that Output 1 increases from Output1Min to
Output1Max as the input increases from Output1InMin to
Output1InMax.
Output 2 decreases from Output2Max to Output2Min as the input
increases from Output2InMin to Output2InMax.
Configuring SplitRange has the following configuration parameter:
SplitRange

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Control Models • 9-49

 Parameter Description Units Valid Default
Values Value
Output1Action Action for Output 1 – Direct Direct
Reverse
Output1Min Minimum value of Output 1 – -1E9 -> 1E9 0
Output1Max Maximum value of Output 1 – -1E9 -> 1E9 100
Output1InMin Value of input above which – -1E9 -> 1E9 0
Output 1 starts to change
Output1InMax Value of input above which – -1E9 -> 1E9 50
Output 1 stops changing
Output2Action Action for Output 2 – Direct Direct
Reverse
Output2Min Minimum value of Output 2 – -1E9 -> 1E9 0
Output2Max Maximum value of Output 2 – -1E9 -> 1E9 100
Output2InMin Value of input above which – -1E9 -> 1E9 50
Output 2 starts to change
Output2InMax Value of input above which – -1E9 -> 1E9 100
Output 2 stops changing

Output1Action for SplitRange

Output1Action specifies whether output 1 increases or decreases as
the input increases:

If Output1Action is The result is

Direct Output 1 increases as Input increases
Reverse Output 1 decreases as Input increases

Output1Min for SplitRange

Output1Min specifies the minimum value of output 1.

Output1Max for SplitRange

Output1Max specifies the maximum value of output 1.

Output1InMin for SplitRange

Output1InMin specifies the value of the input above which Output
1 starts to change.

Output1InMax for SplitRange

Output1InMax specifies the value of the input above which Output
1 no longer changes.

9-50 • Control Models Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 Output2Action for SplitRange
Output2Action specifies whether output 2 increases or decreases as
the input increases:

If Output2Action is The result is

Direct Output 2 increases as Input increases
Reverse Output 2 decreases as Input increases

Output2Min for SplitRange

Output2Min specifies the minimum value of output 2.

Output2Max for SplitRange

Output2Max specifies the maximum value of output 2.

Output2InMin for SplitRange

Output2InMin specifies the value of the input above which Output
2 starts to change.

Output2InMax for SplitRange

Output2InMax specifies the value of the input above which Output
2 no longer changes.

SteamPtoT

P PT T

SteamPtoT uses the extended Antoine parameters for water

(PLXANT) to calculate steam temperature from steam pressure.
Use SteamPtoT as part of a control scheme for a block where:
• Constant Temperature is the heat transfer option
• Steam pressure is the manipulated variable (rather than steam
temperature)

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Control Models • 9-51

 Sum
Input1
Output_
Input2

Sum evaluates its output as the sum of the two input signals.
Sum Equations The equation used in the Sum model is:
Output _ = Input 1 + Input 2

Configuring Sum Sum has no configuration parameters.

Transform

Input_ Output_

Transform can be used to apply one of the following transform

operations to a signal:
• Loge (natural logarithm)
• Square
• Square root
• Power
Transform Equations The equation used depends on the transform operation selected as
follows:
Transform Equation
Loge Output _ = ln( Input _)
None Output _ = Input _
Power Output _ = Input _ Power
Square Output _ = Input _ 2
Square root Output _ = Input _

9-52 • Control Models Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 Configuring Transform has the following configuration parameters:
Transform Parameter Description Units Valid Default
Values Value
Transform Transform type – Loge None
None
Power
Square
Square root
Power Exponent for Power – -500 - > 500 1
transform

Transform for Transform

Transform specifies the type of transform to be applied.

Power for Transform

Power specifies the exponent to be used if the Power transform is
selected.
Output _ = Input _ Power

Superseded Models
Valve_dyn Input_

Output_

Valve_dyn models the dynamics of a valve actuator. It relates the

input signal to a control valve to the valve stem position. It
includes the following options:
• Direct or reverse action
• First-order, second-order, or negligible dynamic effects
• Velocity limiting (when using first- or second-order dynamics)
• Modeling of hysteresis effects caused by valve dead band
Connect Valve_dyn between a controller output signal and the
input signal to a Valve block. Make sure the input signal is in the
range 0 to 100%. The output signal represents the valve percentage
open.

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Control Models • 9-53

 When the first-order dynamics option is used, the valve stem
Valve_dyn Equations
response is modeled using the following first-order differential
equation:
d (Output )
Input = Output + Tau1.
dt
Where:
Tau1 = First-order time constant
For second-order dynamics, the following second-order differential
equation is used:
d 2 (Output ) d (Output )
Input = Tau 2 . 2
+ 2.Gamma.Tau. + Output
dt dt

StemMass
Tau =
Hookes
Where:
Gamma = Damping coefficient
Tau = Natural period
StemMass = Moving mass of valve stem
Hookes = Hooke’s law constant for spring

When velocity limiting is used, the rate of change of stem position

is clipped so that it does not exceed the maximum velocity defined
by the stroke time.
Configuring The properties for Valve_dyn are:
Valve_dyn Property Description Units Valid Default
Values Value
ValveAction Valve action – Direct Direct
Reverse
Dynamics Actuator dynamics – 1st order 1st order
2nd order
None
Tau1 First-order time s 0 -> 1E4 1E-3
constant
StemMass Stem assembly mass kg or lb 1E-3 -> 1E4 1.0
Hookes Spring Hooke’s law N/m or lbf/ft 1 -> 1E10 100000
constant
Gamma Damping factor - 1E-9 -> 1E9 1.0

Continued overleaf…
StrokeTimeDo Time for full scale s 0.01 -> 1E8 1.0
down stroke
StrokeTimeUp Time for full scale s 0.01 -> 1E8 1.0

9-54 • Control Models Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 up stroke
Dband Dead band % 0 -> 100 0.0

If your process models are written to work in time units other than
hours, you will need to change the control model time units. See
Time Units in Control Models, earlier in this chapter.

ValveAction for Valve_dyn

ValveAction specifies whether the valve is direct- or reverse-
acting:
If valve type is As the input signal increases
Direct the valve opens
Reverse the valve closes

Dynamics for Valve_dyn

Dynamics specifies the dynamic relationship between the input
signal and the valve stem position:
If Dynamics is The result is
Second order The valve dynamics are represented by a
second order lag between the input signal
and the valve stem position.
None There are no dynamics, the full effect of a
change in the input is immediately passed to
the output

StemMass for Valve_dyn

StemMass is the mass of the stem assembly. A greater mass results
in a slower response to input signal changes.
StemMass has no effect when Dynamics=None.

Hookes for Valve_dyn

Hookes is the Hooke’s law constant. This is the force exerted per
unit length when the valve spring is compressed. A larger value
results in a faster dynamic response to input signal changes.
Hookes has no effect when Dynamics=None.

Gamma for Valve_dyn

The damping factor Gamma determines the amount of oscillation
in the dynamics response of the stem position to the valve input.
The default value of damping factor is 1.0. This is typical, and will
give a critically damped response. A value greater than 1 gives an
overdamped response, and a value of less then 1 gives an
underdamped or oscillatory response.

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Control Models • 9-55

 Gamma has no effect when Dynamics=None.

StrokeTimeDo for Valve_dyn

StrokeTimeDo is the minimum time in which the valve can move
from fully open to fully closed. The maximum rate of change in
the valve position, in %/s is then determined as 100/StrokeTime.
When Dynamics= 2nd order, the valve will never open or close
faster than this rate.
StrokeTimeDo has no effect when Dynamics=None.

DBand for Valve_dyn

DBand is the dead band for the valve expressed as a percentage of
range. When the input changes direction, it must move by an
amount equal to DBand before the valve position changes. The
following illustration shows the effect of dead band on the valve
position as the input changes.
100

Valve Closing
position
Opening

0 100
Input
signal
DBand

9-56 • Control Models Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

10 Pressure Relief Models

This chapter describes the Aspen Dynamics models designed

specifically for use in simulating pressure relief systems:
• Bursting Disk
• Expansion
• Orifice
• Pressure Safety Valve (PSV)
• Throttle Valve
• DeltaP
These can be used together with other Aspen Dynamics models to
create a complete simulation of your process and its pressure relief
system.
The following models include one or more special Relief ports for
connection of a pressure relief system:
• Flash2
• Flash3
• Mixer
• Radfrac
• RCSTR
The Pipe model also has special features for use in pressure relief
applications.

Note To ensure that the variable specifications remain consistent,

it is strongly recommended that you perform all pressure relief
simulations in pressure-driven mode. For more information, see
the Aspen Dynamics User Guide, Chapter 1.

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Pressure Relief Models • 10-1

 Creating Pressure Relief Piping
Networks
When creating a piping network, to allow for reliable initialization,
ensure that initially the flow is zero (or very small). To do this:
1. If there is no other suitable flow restriction, add a throttle
valve to the beginning of the network.
2. Initialize with the throttle valve closed. Always save the
simulation at this point.
3. Slowly open the throttle valve to achieve the desired flow
rate.
Note If you need to further modify the network, return to the
zero flow case and modify that.

Bursting Disk in Dynamic

Simulations
The Bursting Disk model is used for simulating pressure relief
systems. It uses the same basic approach as that of an orifice plate.
The following points summarize the Bursting Disk model and its
equations:
• The model supports reverse flow
• Adiabatic heat transfer is assumed.
• Subcritical and critical flow can be calculated.
• Handles single- and two-phase flow.
• Models an orifice that opens to a user-specified area at a
prescribed pressure and never closes until manually reset.
• The flow methods used are based on those described for the
Pressure Safety Valve (PSV) model.
The Bursting Disk model is found in the PressureRelief folder of
the Dynamics library.

10-2 • Pressure Relief Models Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 Reverse Flow for Bursting Disk is supported in reverse flow simulations. When
Bursting Disk in configuring your simulation for reverse flow, use the Bursting
Dynamic Simulations Disk Configure form to set the Reverse flow bursting pressure
drop. This allows for a different bursting pressure drop when the
pressure difference across the disk is negative.
There is no flow through Bursting Disk whilst the disk is intact.
The disk ruptures when the pressure drop across the disk has:
• Exceeded the forward bursting pressure drop
-or-
• When reverse flow is enabled, fallen below the reverse
bursting pressure drop
Once ruptured, the flow direction through the disk is determined
by the local pressure gradients.
Note When creating a pressure relief simulation involving
Bursting Disk, you may need to use the Setup button on the
Configure form to initialize an instance of Bursting Disk. The
Setup procedures are based on the assumption of forward flow, so
you should avoid using negative pressure gradients, which would
give reverse flow in Bursting Disk, for the initial starting point.
For more information, see Creating a Reverse Flow Simulation in
Chapter 3 of the Aspen Dynamics User Guide.
Specifying the The Bursting Disk model enables you to specify:
Bursting Disk Model • Bursting pressure
• Flow equation and parameters
Open the Configure form to specify bursting pressure drop. All
other parameters are described in the PSV model.
Initializing the To initialize this model, you must complete the following
Bursting Disk Model procedure. It is advisable to obtain initial convergence with
zero/low flow.
1. From the Dynamics library PressureRelief folder, add an
instance of the model to the flowsheet.
2. Connect input and output streams.
3. Open the Configure form.
4. Set the disk specifications.
5. Configure the flow method.
6. Click the Initialize button.

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Pressure Relief Models • 10-3

 To display results for the model, open the required results form.
Displaying Results
for the Bursting Disk These forms are available for displaying results:
Model
This form Displays
Results Open position
Mass flow
Mass flux
Inlet pressure
Outlet pressure
Pressure drop
Cross-sectional area
ResultsPlot Open position
Mass flow
ResultsSummary Inlet/outlet pressure
Inlet/outlet quality
Inlet/outlet slip
Pressure drop
Mass flow
Equations for the For information on the pressure relief Bursting Disk equations, see
Bursting Disk Model the Equations for the Pressure Safety Valve Model on page 10-23.

Expansion in Dynamic Simulations

The Expansion model is used to calculate the pressure drop across
an expansion or contraction in a duct or pipe. The Expansion
model is found in the PressureRelief folder of the Dynamics
library.
The basic equations account for the mass and momentum balances
across the duct area.
Two calculation options are provided:
• The DIERS method assumes a single, homogeneous mixture
and ignores the effects of compressibility. Single-phase loss
coefficients are used to model irreversible friction losses and
turbulent flow is assumed. The DIERS method models the
effects of choking in Expansions.
• The Schmidt-Friedel method predicts 2- and 3- phase drops in
the expansion and connection area by considering the
momentum flux and the plane reaction force acting on the wall
of the jet formed downstream, as well as the friction and
gravity forces for both the flow through the duct and a fully
developed pipe flow. Liquid entrainment across the duct is also
accounted for. The Schmidt-Friedel method does not model the
effects of choking in Expansions.

10-4 • Pressure Relief Models Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 The model:
• Supports reverse flow
• Assumes adiabatic flow.
Reverse Flow for Expansion is supported in reverse flow simulations. No additional
Expansion in specifications are required to configure Expansion for reverse
Dynamic Simulations flow.
When reverse flow is enabled, flow reversal in Expansion is
indicated by a negative flow rate and pressure drop.
Note When creating a pressure relief simulation involving
Expansion, you may need to use the Setup button on the Configure
form to initialize an instance of Expansion. The Setup procedures
are based on the assumption of forward flow, so you should avoid
using negative pressure gradients, which would give reverse flow
in Expansion, for the initial starting point.
For more information, see Creating a Reverse Flow Simulation in
Chapter 3 of the Aspen Dynamics User Guide.
Specifying the To make specifications to the Expansion model:
Expansion Model 1. From the Dynamics library PressureRelief folder, add an
instance of the model to the flowsheet.
2. Connect input and output streams.
3. Click the right mouse button, point to Forms, and click
Configure.
4. Specify the calculation option as either Schmidt-Friedel, or
DIERS.
5. Specify the fitting option by assigning a value to the fitting
mode parameter. The two valid values are:
• Expansion
• Contraction
6. Specify the inlet (diam_in) and outlet (diam_out) diameters of
the duct area.
No further specification is required.
Initializing the To initialize the Expansion model:
Expansion Model 1. Click the model on the flowsheet.
2. Click the right mouse button, point to Forms, and click
Configure.
3. Click the Initialize button.
Displaying Results To display results for the model:
for the Expansion 1. Click the required block on the flowsheet.
Model
2. Click the right mouse button, point to Forms, and click

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Pressure Relief Models • 10-5

 Results.
These variables are displayed in the model Results table:
• Pressure drop
• Inlet velocity
• Outlet velocity
Equations for the The Expansion model uses the following equations:
Expansion Model • Schmidt-Friedel Expansion
• Schmidt-Friedel Contraction
• DIERS Expansion
• DIERS Contraction

Flow Through Pipe Expansions - (Schmidt-Friedel)

The following equations describe flow through pipe expansions for
the Expansion model:

& 2 2  σ 2,3 − σ 2,3 − f * Expρeff ,2  x − (1 − x )  1 − σ 2,3

 
( ) 
 2
2  & &  2
m
 ρeff ,2 ρeff ,3  ε 2 ρg , 2

(1 − ε 2 )ρfl  
∆PExp =
1 − ΓExp (1 − σ 2,3 )
(1 − x& ) (1 − x& ) 
2 2
1 x& 2  ε   x&
+ ρ 1− ε 
K
= + 
fl 


  − 
ρ eff ρ ε ρ (1 − ε )
g fl  1− ε
 
K 
 ρgε (1 − ε )ρfl 

ε =
1
1−
(1 − x& ) 
K

S (
1 − x& 1 − 0.05 ⋅ We 0.27 ⋅ Re )
0.05 

S=
x& (1 − ε ) ρ fl

(1 − x& ) ε ρg

We =
& x&
m 2 2
d (ρ fl − ρg )
ρg σ *
ρg
& (1 − x& )d
m
Re =
ηfl
0 .7
2  ηfl , 2 
f * Exp = 0.0049 x& 2 (1 − x& )  
 ηg , 2 
ΓExp = 1 − σ 2,3 0.25

10-6 • Pressure Relief Models Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 Where:
∆P = Pressure change (N/m 2 )
&
m = Mass flux (kg/m 2 /s)
σ i, j = Area ratio Ai/Aj (-)

σ∗ = Surface tension (N/m)

f* = Modified friction factor (-)
ρ = Density (kg/m 3 )
ρ eff = Mean effective 2-phase density (kg/m 3 )
ε = Voidage (-)
εK = Mean specific volumetric flow in core (-)

Γ = Base pressure coefficient. This relates the mean base

pressure activing on the jet margin downstream of the
expansion with the mean inlet pressure and the pressure
change. Currently, this relationship is determined empirically.
x& = Specific gas flow (-)
S = Slip ratio
SK = Slip ratio {gas in core vs. total gas} (-)
We = Weber number ( LV 2 ρ σ ) (-)
Re = Reynolds number (DV ρ / µ ) (-)
d = Diameter (m)
η = Viscosity (Pa s)

Subscripts
Exp = Expansion
Con = Contraction
1 = Inlet with fully formed flow
2 = Point of size change
3 = Outlet with fully formed flow
fl = Liquid
g = Gas
“J. Schmidt & L. Friedel – Two-phase Flow Pressure Changes
Across Sudden Expansion in Duct Areas”.
Chem. Eng. Comm; Vols 141-142; pp175-190; 1996.

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Pressure Relief Models • 10-7

 Flow Through Pipe Contractions - (Schmidt-Friedel)
The following equations describe flow through pipe contractions
for the Expansion model:

m3 
& 2
 1
−
σ 3 .1 *


+ f Conρeff ,3 
 x&
−
(1 − x& ) 
2

(
1 − σ 3,1 ) 
2 
( 3 )ρfl 
 

 ρeff ,3 ρeff ,1  ε 3 ρg , 3 − ε 
1
∆PCon =
 

 1 
1 − ΓCon − 1
 σ 3,1 
(1 − x& ) (1 − x& ) 
2 2 2
1 x& 2  ε   x&SK
+ ρ 1− ε 
K
= + 
fl 


  − 
ρ eff ρ ε ρ (1 − ε )
g fl  1− ε
 
K 
 ρgε (1 − ε )ρfl 

ε =
1
1−
(1 − x& ) 
K
 0.50 
S 1 − x& (1 + 0.18 ⋅ We 0.12 ⋅ Re ) 

S=
x& (1 − ε ) ρ fl

(1 − x& ) ε ρg

We =
& x&
m 2 2
d (ρ
fl − ρg )
ρg σ *
ρg
& (1 − x& )d
m
Re =
ηfl
0.8
 ηfl 
f * Con = 5.2 ⋅ 10 −3 x& 0.1 (1 − x& ) σ 3,1 
 ηg ,3 
ΓCon = 0.77σ 3,1(1 − σ 3,1 0.306 )

10-8 • Pressure Relief Models Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 Where:
∆P = Pressure change (N/m 2 )
&
m = Mass flux (kg/m 2 /s)
σ i, j = Area ratio Ai/Aj (-)

σ∗ = Surface tension (N/m)

f* = Modified friction factor (-)
ρ = Density (kg/m 3 )
ρ eff = Mean effective 2-phase density (kg/m 3 )
ε = Voidage (-)
εK = Mean specific volumetric flow in core (-)

Γ = Base pressure coefficient. This relates the mean base pressure

active on the jet margin downstream of the expansion with the
mean inlet pressure and the pressure change. Currently, this
relationship is determined empirically.
x& = Specific gas flow (-)
S = Slip ratio
SK = Slip ratio {gas in core vs. total gas} (-)
We = Weber number (LV 2 ρ / σ )(-)
Re = Reynolds number (DV ρ / µ ) (-)
d = Diameter (m)
η = Viscosity (Pa s)

Subscripts
Exp = Expansion
Con = Contraction
1 = Inlet with fully formed flow
2 = Point of size change
3 = Outlet with fully formed flow
fl = Liquid
g = Gas
“J. Schmidt & L. Friedel – Two-phase Flow Pressure Changes
Across Sudden Expansion in Duct Areas”.
Chem. Eng. Comm; Vols 141-142; pp175-190; 1996.

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Pressure Relief Models • 10-9

 Flow Through Pipe Expansions - (DIERS)
The following equations describe flow through pipe expansions for
the Expansion model:
∆P = ∆Prec + ∆Pnonrec
where:

∆Prec = ρ
(ν 2
2
−ν1
2
)
2
∆Pnonrec = ρ ν 12 K
2
 A
K = 1 − 1 
 A2 
Where:
ν = Velocity (m/s)

A = 2
Cross-sectional area (m )
ρ = Density (kg/m )
3

∆P = Total pressure drop

∆Prec = Recoverable pressure drop due to acceleration

∆Pnonrec = Non-recoverable pressure drop due to friction

K = Loss coefficient

= Upstream
1

= Downstream
2

Note: This method assumes incompressible flow, but may also be

used in compressible flows where the compressibility is not
significant (less than 10%)

H. G. Fisher et al “Emergency Relief System Design Using DIERS

Technology”. AIChE; 1992.

10-10 • Pressure Relief Models Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 Flow Through Pipe Contractions - (DIERS)
The following equations describe flow through pipe contractions
for the Expansion model:
∆P = ∆Prec + ∆Pnonrec
where:

∆Prec = ρ
(ν 2
2
−ν1
2
)
2
∆Pnonrec = ρ ν 22K
2
A 
K = 0.45 ( 1 −  2  )
 A1 
Where:
ν = Velocity (m/s)

A = 2
Cross-sectional area (m )
ρ = Density (kg/m )
3

∆P = Total pressure drop

∆Prec = Recoverable pressure drop due to acceleration

∆Pnonrec = Non-recoverable pressure drop due to friction

K = Loss coefficient

= Upstream
1

= Downstream
2

Note: This method assumes incompressible flow, but may also be

used in compressible flows where the compressibility is not
significant (less than 10%)

H. G. Fisher et al “Emergency Relief System Design Using DIERS

Technology”.
AIChE; 1992.

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Pressure Relief Models • 10-11

 Orifice in Dynamic Simulations
The Orifice model is used for simulating pressure relief systems. It
is used to calculate the flow through a specified aperture area. The
Orifice model is found in the PressureRelief folder of the
Dynamics library.
The following points summarize the model and its equations:
• Supports reverse flow
• Adiabatic heat transfer is assumed.
• Sub-critical and critical flow can be calculated.
• Handles single and two-phase flow.
• The flow methods used are based on those described for the
Pressure Safety Valve (PSV) model

Reverse Flow for Orifice is supported in reverse flow simulations. No additional

Orifice in Dynamic specifications are required to configure Orifice for reverse flow.
Simulations When reverse flow is enabled, flow reversal in Orifice is indicated
by a negative flow rate and pressure drop.
Note When creating a pressure relief simulation involving
Orifice, you may need to use the Setup button on the Configure
form to initialize an instance of Orifice. The Setup procedures are
based on the assumption of forward, so you should avoid using
negative pressure gradients, which would give reverse flow in
Orifice, for the initial starting point.
For more information, see Creating a Reverse Flow Simulation in
Chapter 3 of the Aspen Dynamics User Guide.
Specifying the Orifice Open the Configure form to specify the following for the Orifice
Model model:
• Pipe diameter
• Orifice diameter
All other parameters are described in the PSV model.
Initializing the Orifice To initialize the Orifice model, you must complete the following
Model procedure. It is advisable to obtain initial convergence with
low/zero flow.
1. Add an instance of the model to the flowsheet from the
PressureRelief folder of the Dynamics library.
2. Connect input and output streams.
3. Open the Configure form.

10-12 • Pressure Relief Models Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 4. Set the disk specifications.
5. Configure the flow method.
6. Click the Initialize button.
Displaying Results To display results for the model, open the required results form.
for the Orifice Model The following forms are available for displaying results:
This form Displays
Results Mass flow
Mass flux
Inlet pressure
Outlet pressure
Pressure drop
Cross-sectional area
ResultsPlot Pressure drop
Mass flow
ResultsSummary Inlet/outlet pressure
Inlet/outlet quality
Inlet/outlet slip
Pressure drop
Mass flow
Equations for the For information on the Orifice model equations, see the Equations
Orifice Model for the Pressure Safety Valve Model on page 10-23.

Pressure Safety Valve in Dynamic

Simulations
The Pressure Safety Valve model is a general Pressure Safety
Valve (PSV) used for simulating pressure relief systems. The
opening and closing characteristics closely resemble those of a real
safety valve. By selecting appropriate parameter values, you can
configure a “pop-open/pop-close” or “gradual open” type valve.
The PSV model is found in the PressureRelief folder of the
Dynamics library.
The following points summarize the model and its equations:
• Supports reverse flow
• Can calculate subcritical and critical flow
• Can model single- or two-phase flow
• Flow equations are taken from:

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Pressure Relief Models • 10-13

 • Modified omega method proposed by J. Schmidt and F.
Westphal (1997)
• Frozen flow, Henry-Fauske (1992)
• Approach proposed by R. Diener and L. Friedel (1997)
• Ideal nozzle (HEM) proposed by DIERS (1992)
• Ideal nozzle (HEM) proposed by Simpson (similar to
Aspen Plus)
• Initally subcooled flow method proposed by J. Leung and
M. Grolmes
• Simple single-phase relationship (incompressible flow)
• Conventional or balanced type
• Various valve characteristics can be defined
• User-defined hysteresis (different open and close pressures)
Reverse Flow for PSV is supported in reverse flow simulations. No additional
Pressure Safety Valve specifications are required to configure PSV for reverse flow.
in Dynamic When reverse flow is enabled, flow reversal in PSV is indicated by
Simulations a negative flow rate and pressure drop. The behavior of PSV in a
reverse flow simulation depends on the Valve Type:
• A PSV of Valve Type = Conventional:
The effective pressure acting on the valve spring will cause the
valve to close under the action of a negative pressure drop and
thus will not allow flow reversal during simulation.
• A PSV of Valve Type = Balanced:
The pressure on the valve spring is influenced only by the
upstream pressure, not the overall pressure drop across the
PSV. Therefore the valve may remain open under the action of
a negative pressure drop and thus may permit reverse flow
during simulation.
You can choose the Valve Type for PSV on the hysteresis tab of
the Configure form.
Note When creating a pressure relief simulation involving PSV,
you may need to use the Setup button on the Configure form to
initialize an instance of PSV. The Setup procedures are based on
the assumption of forward flow, so you should avoid using
negative pressure gradients, which would give reverse flow in
PSV, for the initial starting point.
For more information, see Creating a Reverse Flow Simulation in
Chapter 3 of the Aspen Dynamics User Guide.

10-14 • Pressure Relief Models Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 Specifying the The model allows you tospecify the following:
Pressure Safety Valve • Component list and valid phases
Model
• Flow equation
• Stagnation pressure
• Hysteresis
• Opening characteristics
• Viscosity correction

Specifying the Component List and Valid Phases for the PSV
Model
To specify the component list and valid phases, open the Configure
form. On the Type tab, you can specify the following:
For this option You can specify
Component List From user defined list
Valid phases Liquid
Vapor
Vapor-Liquid
Vapor-Liquid-Liquid

Specifying the Calculation Method for the Pressure Safety

Valve Model
The following correlations for estimating the flow through a relief
device are available:
• Incompressible flow
• Ideal HEM (DIERS) equations
• Ideal HEM (Simpson) equations
• Henry-Fauske Frozen Flow equations
• Schmidt-Westphal equations
• Diener equations
• Leung-Grolmes equations

To specify the flow equation, open the Configure form. On this

form you can specify the following:
• Diameter
• Discharge coefficient
• Flow calculation method

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Pressure Relief Models • 10-15

 The Diener flow calculation method enables you to specify the
flow coefficient, whether to use a constant area ratio, and constant
area ratio.
For two-phase flow, there are two discharge coefficients: one for
vapor flow Cd vap and one for liquid flow Cd liq . The actual
discharge coefficient is determined from the following expression:
Cd = Cd vap ε o + Cd liq (1 − ε o )

Where ε 0 is the inlet volume fraction.

Specifying the Inlet Stagnation Pressure

The flow equations for calculating the flow rate through a pressure
safety valve are developed by integrating a differential flow
equation along an isentropic path, from a lower limit of zero
velocity and the corresponding pressure, to the upper limit of
velocity and pressure at the throat of the valve nozzle.
As a consequence, the resulting flow equations do not account for
the actuality of a nonzero velocity at the valve inlet and their
application requires the determination of an inlet pressure that
corresponds to the hypothetical zero-inlet-velocity specification.
This is known formally as the stagnation pressure.
The Pressure Safety Valve model provides two methods for
calculating the stagnation pressure:
• Use the valve inlet conditions as the stagnation conditions.
This method should be used for valves mounted directly on top
of vessels with no inlet piping or fittings.
• Calculate the stagnation pressure from the flowing pressure
and velocity at the valve inlet. This method is used for cases
where there are frictional pressure losses between the vessel
and the relief valve inlet.
You can select which method to use on the Flow Calculations tab
of the Configure form.

10-16 • Pressure Relief Models Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 Specifying Hysteresis for the Pressure Safety Valve Model
To specify hysteresis, open the Configure form and select the
Hysteresis tab.
This table shows what you can configure using this form. Those
marked in bold are the things that must be defined to model the
behavior of a pressure safety valve (PSV) realistically:
Description on form Meaning
Valve type Balanced or Conventional
Set pressure Pressure at which valve begins to open
Full lift, opening Pressure at which opening valve becomes
fully open
Full lift, closing Pressure at which valve begins to close
Reset pressure Pressure at which closing valve become
fully closed
Primary lift valve position Initial valve position when valve first
opens
Reset valve position Maximum valve position for a closing
valve
For a conventional safety valve, the set pressure and other
characteristic pressures are affected by the pressure on the
discharge side of the valve. As the downstream pressure increases,
the characteristic pressures will increase by the same amount. The
characteristic pressures you enter should be for a downstream
pressure of 1 atm absolute (equivalent to 0 atm gauge).
For a balanced safety valve, the characteristic pressures are
independent of the downstream pressure.

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Pressure Relief Models • 10-17

 The following diagram illustrates the behavior of such a pressure
safety valve. You can also see this diagram on the Hysteresis tab.
The diagram is updated according to the data entered.

Full Lift, closing

100%

Full Lift, opening

Valve
Opening %

Reset
Lift

Primary Lift

Blowdown Overpressure

Reset Set
Pressure Pressure Inlet Pressure

Note Only one of the Full lift, closing and Reset pressures needs
to be specified. The other is calculated to maintain a slope parallel
to the opening characteristics.
By careful selection of these parameters, you can configure many
types of relief valve, for example:
• Pop open, pop close
• Gradual open, gradual close

Pop Open, Pop Close Relief Valve

The following specification will open the relief valve at 2.5 bar to
100%, and close it at 2 bar (see the pictures on the next page):

10-18 • Pressure Relief Models Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Pressure Relief Models • 10-19
 Gradual Open, Gradual Close Relief Valve
The following specification will begin to open the relief valve at
2.5 bar, gradually opening to 100% at 3 bar. It will close the valve
in a similar manner (see this picture and the picture on the next
page):

10-20 • Pressure Relief Models Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 Specifying Opening Characteristics for the Pressure Safety
Valve Model
To configure the opening characteristics, open the Configure form
and select the Type tab.
The characteristic equation for the valve relates the flow
coefficient to the valve opening. The six built-in characteristic
equations are:
• Linear
• Parabolic
• Square root
• Quick opening
• Equal percentage
• Hyperbolic
A User tab option is also supplied. Select this and enter the values
in the User Characteristics tab. To see a diagram showing the
characteristics selected, view the Characteristics Diagram tab.

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Pressure Relief Models • 10-21

 Specifying Viscosity Correction for the Pressure Safety Valve
Model
To configure the viscosity correction, open the Configure form and
select the Viscosity tab.
The viscosity correction equation applies a correction factor on the
calculated flowrate dependant on the fluid viscosity. On this form
you are able to specify:
• If the correction term is to be used
• A user liquid viscosity (temperature dependent)
• A user vapor viscosity (constant)
Initializing the To initialize the Pressure Safety Valve model:
Pressure Safety Valve 1. Add an instance of the model to the flowsheet.
Model
2. Connect the input and output streams using the
MaterialStream type.
3. Open the Configure form.
4. Specify the diameter.
5. Specify the options for hysteresis.
6. Specify the opening characteristics.
7. Specify the flow calculation method and required parameters.
8. Click Initialize.

10-22 • Pressure Relief Models Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 Displaying Results To display results for the model, open the required results form.
for the Pressure These forms are available for displaying results:
Safety Valve Model
This form Displays
Results Valve open position
Vent mass flow
Vent mass flux
Cross-sectional area
Inlet pressure
Outlet pressure
Pressure drop
Inlet Vapor Fraction
Exit Vapor Fraction
ResultsPlot Valve open position
Vent mass flow
Inlet vapor fraction
Exit vapor fraction
ResultsSummary Inlet/outlet pressure
Inlet/outlet quality
Inlet/outlet slip
Pressure drop
Mass flow
Equations for the The Pressure Safety Valve (PSV) model uses the following
Pressure Safety Valve equations:
Model • Flow
• Opening characteristics
• Viscosity Correction

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Pressure Relief Models • 10-23

 Flow Equations
The following equations are used to describe flow for the Pressure
Safety Valve model:
• Simple equation
• Ideal HEM (DIERS) equations
• Ideal HEM (Simpson) equations
• Henry-Fauske Frozen Flow equations
• Schmidt-Westphal equations
• Diener equations
• Leung-Grolmes equations
• Single Phase Compressible Flow Equations

Incompressible Flow
For all flow methods the following relationship is applied:
V
Flow MASS = C d .Flux
100
Where:
Flux = Mass flux (kg/m2/s)
V = Valve opening (%)
Cd = Discharge coefficient
Simple (incompressible fluid)
Flux = Cv 2.∆P.ρ 0
Cv = Sizing coefficient
∆P = Pressure drop (bar)
ρ0 = Inlet density (kg/m3)

Ideal HEM (DIERS) Equations

The literature reference for these equations is:
H. Fisher, H. Forrest, S. Grossel, J. Huff, A. Muller, J. Noronha, S.
Shaw and B. Tilly (1992). “Emergency Relief System Design
Using DIERS Technology”, American Institute of Chemical
Engineers, pp. 71–73.
v a(1 − η )
= +1
v0 η
P
η=
P0
v = Xv g + (1 − X )v l

10-24 • Pressure Relief Models Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 Solve for with a flash at a user-definable fraction of the inlet
pressure (default 0.7).
2P0
− [a lnη + (a − 1)(1 − η )]
v0
G=
a(1 − η )
+1
η
P0
Gc = η c
av 0

At critical flow G = Gc so solve for η c

IF η 〉 η c THEN Flow is critical
Flux = Gc
ELSE Flow is subsonic
Flux = G
ENDIF
Where:
v = Weight-flow-mean 2-phase specific volume
(m3/kg)
v = Specific volume (m3/kg)
a = Fitting constant
η = Pressure ratio
P = Pressure (bar)
X = Mass vapor fraction
G = Mass flux (kg/m2/s)
Subscripts
0 = Stagnation
c = Critical

Ideal HEM (Simpson) Equations

The literature reference for these equations is:
L. Simpson. “Navigating the Two-Phase Maze”, Union Carbide
Corporation.

v  P  β 
− 1 = α  N  − 1
vN  P  

Where:
N = A, B or C and

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Pressure Relief Models • 10-25

 PA = P0

IF PA 〈 2.Pexit
PB = 0.5(PA + Pexit )
PC = Pexit

ELSE
PB = 0.75 PA
PC = 0.5 PA

ENDIF
Solve for α and β
2 Pa
G2 = −
v a2 ∫
P0
v .dP
MAX

This is solved numerically.

Where:
v = Specific volume (m3/kg)
P = Pressure (bar)
G = Mass flux (kg/m2/s)
α = Fitting constant
β = Fitting constant
N = A, B, or C
A,B,C = Flash points for correlation
Subscripts
0 = Stagnation
a = Throat

10-26 • Pressure Relief Models Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 Henry-Fauske Frozen Flow Equations
The literature reference for these equations is:
H. Fisher, H. Forrest, S. Grossel, J. Huff, A. Muller, J. Noronha, S.
Shaw and B. Tilly (1992). “Emergency Relief System Design
Using DIERS Technology”, American Institute of Chemical
Engineers, pp. 64–68.
2 P0  
k −1
k
G = 2 (1 − X ).V f 0 (1 − η ) + X .Vg 0
2
(1 − η k 
V a  k −1 
1
V a = (1 − X ).Vf + X .Vg ηk

Pa
η=
Po

Gc2 =
Pa  v fa
− C
(
(Vga − V fa ) 1 / n −1 / k )
 
X0  n
Pg
(S g 0 − S f 0 ) 

(1 − α 0 ) (1 − η ) + k

ηc
 k −1 

 k 

=
α0 c
(k − 1)
1 k
+
2ϕα 2
a (k − 1)
Where:
C pf
( [ (1 − X )
]+ X )
C pg
n=
C
( [ (1 − X ) pf ] + X )
C pg k

1 1
 − 
1 n k
ϕ = − CPg 
n (S g 0 − S f 0 )
1 (1 − X ) v f
=1+
α X vg

IF η 〉 η c THEN Flow is critical

Flux = Gc
ELSE Flow is subsonic
Flux = G
ENDIF

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Pressure Relief Models • 10-27

 Where:
v = Specific volume (kg/m3)
η = Pressure ratio
P = Pressure (bar)
X = Mass vapor fraction
G = Mass flux (kg/m2/s)
S = Specific entropy (kJ/kmol/K)
Cp = Specific heat at constant pressure (kJ/kg/K)
α = Volume vapor fraction
k = Isentropic expansion exponent
ϕ = Intermediate function
n = Intermediate coefficient

Subscripts
0 = Stagnation
c = Critical
a = Throat
g = Vapor
f = Liquid

Schmidt-Westphal Equations
The literature reference for these equations is:
J. Schmidt and F. Westphal (1997). “Praxisbezogens Vorgehen bei
der Auslegung von Sicherheitsventilen und deren
Abblaseleitungen für die Durchströmung mit Dampf/Flüssigkeits-
Gemischen” In: Chemie Ingenieur Technik, Vol. 69, pp. 776–1091.
P ' (T0 )
ηs =
P0
2 ⋅ω
η s,MIN =
1+ 2 ⋅ω
2
v g0 − v f 0 η s ⋅ C Pf 0 ⋅ P0 ⋅ T0  v g 0 − v f 0 
ω = x& 0 ⋅ + ⋅ 
v0 v0  ∆hv 0 

10-28 • Pressure Relief Models Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 IF : η s < η s,MIN
ηc = ηs
ψ = 1− η

ELSEIF : η s > 1
k
 2  k −1
ηc =  
 K + 1
k  k 
2 k +1
ψ = η − η k 
k − 1  
ELSE
ω 2 − 2ω + 1 2 η  3
0= η c − 2(ω − 1)η c + ω ⋅ η s ⋅ ln c  + ω ⋅ η s − 1
2 ⋅ ηs ⋅ ω  ηs  2
 η  
2 ⋅ (1 − η s ) + 2 ⋅  ω ⋅ η s ⋅ ln s  − (ω − 1)(η s − η ) 
 η  
   
ψ =
 η  
2 ⋅ ω ⋅  s − 1 + 1
  η  
 
ENDIF
WHERE
Pexit
ηa =
P0
IF : η a ≤ η c
η = ηc
ELSE
η = ηa
ENDIF

α = α g ⋅ ε 0 + α f ⋅ (1 − ε 0 )
FLUX = α ⋅ ψ
Where:
v = Specific volume (m3/kg)
η = Pressure ratio
P = Pressure (bar)
x& = Mass vapor fraction
Cp = Specific heat at constant pressure (kJ/kg/K)
α = Flow factor

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Pressure Relief Models • 10-29

 k = Isentropic expansion exponent
ϕ = Flow function
ω = Compressibility factor
ε = Volume fraction
P' (T∩ ) = Inlet vapor pressure (bar)
∆h = Heat of evaporation (kJ/kg)
Subscripts
0 = Stagnation
c = Critical
a = Exit
g = Vapor
f = Liquid

Diener Equations
The literature reference for these equations is:
R.Diener and L.Friedel (1997). “Procedure to calculate the mass
flowrate through certain types of valves, rupture discs, orifices,
nozzles and other flow contractions”, (internal document).
2(1 − x& i ) 2
ε i = 1−
 v g ,i 
1 − 2 x& i + 1 + 4 x& i (1 − x& i ) − 1
 v f ,i 
x& i ⋅ v g ,i (1 − x& i ) ⋅ v f ,i
2

v 2 ph,i = +
εi 1− ε i
v hom,i = x& i ⋅ v g ,i + (1 − x& i ) ⋅ v f ,i

10-30 • Pressure Relief Models Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 1.1
σ* =
2
 Ain ⋅ σ *
FL2 
  +1
 K C 
 v 
P − Pexit
FL = 0
P0 − Pa
2
1  A ⋅σ *  2σ * (1 − σ * )
ζ form =  in  − (1 − σ *2 ) +

C  Kv  1 − (1 − σ *0.25 )(1 − σ * )
P0
2∫ v 2 ph ⋅ dp
Pa
FLUX = σ *

(v 2 ph,a − σ *2 ⋅ v 2 ph,in )
FLUX  2(σ * ⋅ v 2 ph,a − σ *2 ⋅ v 2 ph,exit 
Pa = Pexit −  − ζ form ⋅ v hom, a 
 1 − (1 − σ )(1 − σ * )
*0.25
2 

Integral is solved numerically using a similar approach to that

detailed by Simpson.
Critical pressure defined as the throat pressure (Pa) if:
dM
=0
dp
AND
d 2M
<0
dp 2

that is, maximum turning point.

IF Pa,c 〉1.5 Pexit THEN
Flow is critical
ELSE
Flow is subsonic
ENDIF
Where:
v = Specific volume (m3/kg)
P = Pressure (bar)
x& = Mass vapor fraction
Cp = Specific heat at constant pressure (kJ/kg/K)
k = Isentropic expansion exponent
ζ = Form resistance coefficient
ε = Volume fraction
FL = Pressure recovery factor

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Pressure Relief Models • 10-31

 C = Constant (3.858.10 −10 )
KV = Flow coefficient
A = Cross-sectional area (m2)
σ ∗
= Area ratio
Subscripts
0 = Stagnation
c = Critical
a = Vena contracta
g = Vapor
f = Liquid
2ph = Two-phase
hom = Homogeneous
IN = Inlet
VC = Vena Contracta

Leung-Grolmes Equations
The literature reference for these equations is:
J. C. Leung and M. A. Grolmes (1988). “A Generalized correlation
for flashing choked flow of initially subcooled liquid”.
Journal of AIChE, Vol. 34 (4). Pp.688-691.

Ps P P
ηs = ; ηc = c ; η = ;
Po Po Po
2
C pf To Ps  υ fgo 
ω=  
υ fo  h fgo 


2ω − 1
IF ηs <
2ω
Gc = 2 ρ fo
2
( Po − Ps )
ηc = ηs

ELSE
Pρ 
Gc = ηc  0 fo 
2

 ωη s 
 2ω   1  2ω − 1  

ηc = ηs   1 − 1 −  
 2ω − 1   η s  2ω  


10-32 • Pressure Relief Models Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 ENDIF
1
   ηs   2
2 (1 − η s ) + 2  ωη s 1n   − (ω − 1) (η s − η ) 
  η  
G 2 = Po ρ fo
  ηs  
 ω  − 1 + 1
 
 η  

IF η > η s THEN flow is critical

flux = Gc

ELSE flow is sub-critical

flux = G

ENDIF

Where:
η = Pressure ratio
ω = intermediate function
Cp = specific heat at constant pressure (kj/kg k)
ρ = Pressure (N/m2)
T = Temperature (k)
υ = Specific volume (m3/kg)
h = Specific enthalpy (kj/kg)

Subscripts
s = Saturation
0 = Stagnation
c = Critical
f = Liquid
g = Vapor
fg = Difference between vapor and liquid phase property

Single Phase Compressible Flow Equations

The discharge flux of an ideal gas undergoing isentropic expansion
though a nozzle is given by:

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Pressure Relief Models • 10-33

 2k  k2 k +1

G= P0 ρ 0 η − η k 
k −1  

Where:
G = Mass flux at discharge
Cp
k = Isentropic expansion exponent ( )
Cv
ρ0 = Mass density at stagnation conditions
P0 = Stagnation pressure
Pc = Critical pressure
P
η= = Pressure ratio
P0
For choked flow:
k
 2  k −1
η = ηc =  
 k + 1
Where:
Pc
ηc = = Critical pressure ratio
P0
This equation can be used for non-ideal gases provided the
assumptions of constant compressibility and constant k are not
seriously violated.
The literature references for these equations are:
1. “Sizing, Selection and Installation of Pressure-Relieving
Devices in Refineries. Part I- Sizing and Selection” API
Recommended Practice 520, 5th edition, (1990), pp. 30-34.
2. “Guidelines for Pressure Relief and Effluent Handling
Systems”, Center for Chemical Process Safety of the
American Institute of Chemical Engineers(1998), pp. 253-261
3. McCabe W., L., Smith J. C., Harriott, P., “Unit operations of
Chemical Engineering”, (1985), pp. 112-118.

10-34 • Pressure Relief Models Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 Opening The valve opening, V (%) is related to valve position, P (%) by the
Characteristics following relationships:
Equations Type Equation
Linear V =P
Parabolic V = 0.01P 2
Square Root V = 10.0 P
Quick Opening 10.0P
V =
1.0 + 9.9 × 10 −3 P 2
Equal Percentage 0.01P 2
V =
2.0 + 1.0 × 10 −8 P 4
Hyperbolic 0.1P
V =
1.0 − 9.9 × 10 −5 P 2

Viscosity Correction The API viscosity correction factor is used:

Equations IF Re < 200 THEN
Kv = 0.248534 ln( R e) − 0.5668
ELSE
Kv = −0.05237051 + 0.20326 Re − 0.009780694 Re 2
ENDIF
Where:
Re = Reynold’s number
Liquid viscosity may be defined from the following expression, if
required:
B
( A+ )
Visc , Liq = e T

Where:
Visc is viscosity in cP
T is Temperature in K
A, B are specified by the user

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Pressure Relief Models • 10-35

 Throttle Valve in Dynamic
Simulations
The Throttle Valve model is used for simulating pressure relief
systems. It relates the valve position to the flow through the valve.
The following points summarize the model and its equations:
• Supports reverse flow
• Adiabatic flow is assumed.
• The valve position can be defined.
• Subcritical and critical flow can be calculated.
• Handles single- or two-phase flow.
• The flow methods used are based on those described for the
Pressure Safety Valve (PSV) model.
The Throttle Valve model is found in the PressureRelief folder of
the Dynamics library.
Reverse Flow for Throttle Valve is supported in reverse flow simulations. No
Throttle Valve in additional specifications are required to configure Throttle Valve
Dynamic Simulations for reverse flow.
When reverse flow is enabled, flow reversal in Throttle Valve is
indicated by a negative flow rate and pressure drop.
Note When creating a pressure relief simulation involving
Throttle Valve, you may need to use the Setup button on the
Configure form to initialize an instance of Throttle Valve. The
Setup procedures are based on the assumption of forward flow, so
you should avoid using negative pressure gradients, which would
give reverse flow in Throttle Valve, for the initial starting point.
For more information, see Creating a Reverse Flow Simulation in
Chapter 3 of the Aspen Dynamics User Guide.
Specifying the Open the Configure form to specify the valve position.
Throttle Valve Model All other parameters are described in the PSV model.

10-36 • Pressure Relief Models Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 Initializing the To initialize the model, you must complete the following
Throttle Valve Model procedure. It is advisable to obtain initial convergence with
low/zero flow.
1. From the PressureRelief folder of the Dynamics library, add
an instance of the model to the flowsheet.
2. Connect input and output streams.
3. Open the Configure form.
4. Set the disk specifications.
5. Configure the flow method.
6. Click the Initialize button.
Displaying Results To display results for the model, open the required results form.
for the Throttle Valve These forms are available for displaying results:
Model This form Displays
Results Valve open position
Mass flow
Mass flux
Inlet pressure
Outlet pressure
Pressure drop
Cross-sectional area
Continued overleaf…
ResultsPlot Valve open position
Mass flow
ResultsSummary Inlet/outlet pressure
Inlet/outlet quality
Inlet/outlet slip
Pressure drop
Mass flow
Equations for the For information on the Throttle Valve equations, see Equations for
Throttle Valve Model the Pressure Safety Valve Model on page 10-23.

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Pressure Relief Models • 10-37

 DeltaP in Dynamic Simulations
The DeltaP model is a simple model of a valve or flow resistance
which directly relates the pressure drop to the flow rate. It can also
be used to calculate velocity head in vessels.
The model:
• Supports reverse flow
• Assumes adiabatic heat transfer.
Reverse Flow for DeltaP is supported in reverse flow simulations. No additional
DeltaP in Dynamic specifications are required to configure DeltaP for reverse flow.
Simulations When reverse flow is enabled, flow reversal in DeltaP is indicated
by a negative flow rate and pressure drop.
Note When creating a pressure relief simulation involving
DeltaP, you may need to use the Setup button on the Configure
form to initialize an instance of DeltaP. The Setup procedures are
based on the assumption of forward flow, so you should avoid
using negative pressure gradients, which would give reverse flow
in DeltaP, for the initial starting point.
For more information, see Creating a Reverse Flow Simulation in
Chapter 3 of the Aspen Dynamics User Guide.
Specifying the DeltaP To make specifications for the DeltaP model:
Model • Click the required block on the flowsheet, then click the right
mouse button, point to Forms, and click Configure.
The DeltaP model enables you to specify these options:
When this option is selected The following specification is
required
Flow-Calc Designed mass density
Designed volumetric flow rate
Designed pressure drop
Press-Calc Only the pressure drop needs to be
specified.
Velocity head Number of velocity head
Effective diameter of the vessel’s neck
Initializing the DeltaP The following procedure assumes you are performing Initialization
Model runs and that you are adding the DeltaP model to the end of a pre-
converge network. To initialize the model:
1. Add an instance of the DeltaP model to the flowsheet from
the Dynamic/Pressure Relief folder.
2. Connect the input and output streams using the
MaterialStream type.

10-38 • Pressure Relief Models Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 3. Open the Configure form.
4. Make the general specifications for the DeltaP model.
5. Click Initialize.
Displaying Results To display results for the model:
for the DeltaP Model • Click the required block on the flowsheet, then click the right
mouse button, point to Forms, and click Results.
The following variables are displayed in the model Results table:
• Molar flow rate
• Flow coefficient
Equations for the For the Flow-Calc option in the DeltaP model, the following
DeltaP Model equations describe user specified pressure loss:
∆P
= K * Flow 2
ρ

∆Pdesign
K= * ρ design
Flow 2 design
Where:
∆P = Actual pressure drop
ρ = Fluid density
K = Flow coefficient
Flow = Volumetric flow rate
∆Pdesign = Design pressure drop
Flow design = Design volumetric flow rate
ρ design = Design mass density

For velocity head calculation, the following equation is used:

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Pressure Relief Models • 10-39

 References
R.Diener and L.Friedel (1997). “Procedure to calculate the mass
flowrate through certain types of valves, rupture discs, orifices,
nozzles and other flow contractions”, (internal document).
H. Fisher, H. Forrest, S. Grossel, J. Huff, A. Muller, J. Noronha, S.
Shaw and B. Tilly (1992). “Emergency Relief System Design
Using DIERS Technology”, American Institute of Chemical
Engineers, pp. 71–73.
H.G.Fisher et al., Emergency Relief System Design Using DIERS
Technology, American Institute of Chemical Engineers, 1992.
H. Fisher, H. Forrest, S. Grossel, J. Huff, A. Muller, J. Noronha, S.
Shaw and B. Tilly (1992). “Emergency Relief System Design
Using DIERS Technology”, American Institute of Chemical
Engineers, pp. 64–68.
J. Schmidt and F. Westphal (1997). “Praxisbezogens Vorgehen bei
der Auslegung von Sicherheitsventilen und deren
Abblaseleitungen für die Durchströmung mit Dampf/Flüssigkeits-
Gemischen” In: Chemie Ingenieur Technik, Vol. 69, pp. 776–1091.
L. Simpson. “Navigating the Two-Phase Maze”, Union Carbide
Corporation.

10-40 • Pressure Relief Models Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

11 Global Parameters

Global parameters are defined in the Aspen Dynamics library and

are used in many different models. There are several types of
Global Parameters:
• Fundamental constants such as PI, g, R
• Units of measurement conversion factors
• Configuration parameters used to turn functionality on or off,
such as GlobalLiquidHead and GlobalRFlow
• Global variables where the same value is used in many models,
for example Ambient temperature or PMax
The parameters which you may change  the configuration
parameters and global variables  are listed in the Globals table.
To open the Globals table:
• In the Explorer window, select Simulation, and then select
Globals in the Contents of Simulation window.
The definition of the Globals table is in the dynf file exported from
Aspen Plus, so you can access the table only if you have loaded a
dynf file.
If you are developing your own models or modifying Aspen
Dynamics models, you may wish to use some of the fundamental
constants or units of measurement conversion factors that are
defined in the Aspen Dynamics library. As these are hidden
parameters, they do not appear in the Aspen Dynamics user
interface. They are listed in the next section, List of Global
Parameters.

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Global Parameters • 11-1

 List of Global Parameters
The table lists the global parameters in Aspen Dynamics, most of
which are marked as hidden.
Note that the values may change in future versions of Aspen
Dynamics. If in doubt, print out the latest values:
Name Visible Type Value Description
ADVersion hidden realparameter 12.1.0 Aspen Dynamics version
hr_TO_s hidden realparameter 3600 Convert hr -> s
m_TO_mm hidden realparameter 1000 Convert m -> mm
bar_TO_N_m2 hidden realparameter 1.00E+05 Convert bar -> N/m2
GJ_TO_barm3 hidden realparameter 1.00E+04 Convert GJ -> bar m3
J_TO_GJ hidden realparameter 1.00E-09 Convert J -> GJ
kW_TO_GJ_hr hidden realparameter 0.0036 Convert kW -> GJ/hr
mmH2O_TO_N_m2 hidden realparameter 9.80665 Convert mmH2O -> N/m2
N_m2_TO_bar hidden realparameter 1.00E-05 Convert N/m2 -> bar
kg_TO_N hidden realparameter 9.80665 Convert kg -> N
C_TO_K hidden realparameter 273.15 Convert C -> K
barm3_TO_GJ hidden realparameter 1.00E-04 Convert bar m3 -> GJ
kW_TO_W hidden realparameter 1.00E+03 Convert kW -> W
GJ_s_TO_kW hidden realparameter 1.00E+06 Convert GJ/s -> kW
GJ_TO_kJ hidden realparameter 1.00E+06 Convert GJ -> kJ
kmole_TO_mole hidden realparameter 1.00E+03 Convert kmole -> mole
For backward compatibility
ucf1 hidden realparameter 3600 Convert hr -> s
ucf2 hidden realparameter 1000 Convert m -> mm
ucf3 hidden realparameter 1.00E+05 Convert bar -> N/m2
ucf4 hidden realparameter 1.00E+04 Convert GJ -> bar m3
ucf5 hidden realparameter 1.00E-09 Convert J -> GJ
ucf6 hidden realparameter 0.0036 Convert kW -> GJ/hr
ucf7 hidden realparameter 9.80665 Convert mmH2O -> N/m2
ucf8 hidden realparameter 1.00E-05 Convert N/m2 -> bar
ucf9 hidden realparameter 9.80665 Convert kg -> N
ucf12 hidden realparameter 273.15 Convert C -> K
ucf13 hidden realparameter 1.00E-04 Convert bar m3 -> GJ
Continued overleaf…

11-2 • Global Parameters Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

ucf15 hidden realparameter 1.00E+03 Convert kW -> W
ucf16 hidden realparameter 1.00E+06 Convert GJ/s -> kW
ucf18 hidden realparameter 1.00E+06 Convert GJ -> kJ
Useful constants
g realparameter 9.80665 Acceleration due to gravity
(m/s2)
R realparameter 8.31433 Ideal gas constant
(kJ/kmol/k)
zero hidden realparameter 0 zero
one hidden realparameter 1 one
PI hidden realparameter 3.141593 Pi
uec1 hidden realparameter 9.80665 Duplicated for backwards
compatiblity
uec4 hidden realparameter 8.31433 Duplicated for backwards
compatiblity
uec2 hidden realparameter 750 Empirical constant in Francis
weir equaton.
uec3 hidden realparameter 0.50031 Constant in tray pressure
equation.
uec5 hidden realparameter 0.555 Constant in packing
hydraulics correlation
uec6 hidden realparameter 1.27E-08 Constant in downcomer
backup correlation
uec7 hidden realparameter 0.2104 Empirical constant in Francis
weir equation.
T_min realparameter -214 Temperature lower limit (C)
T_max realparameter 1995 Temperature upper limit
(C)
P_min realparameter 0.0001 Pressure lower limit (bar)
P_max realparameter 500.0 Pressure upper limit (bar)
F_max realparameter 1.00E+06 Flow rate upper limit
(kmol/hr
DPmax realparameter 5000 Pressure drop upper limit
(bar)
DPmin hidden realparameter 0 Pressure drop lower limit
(bar)
F_min hidden realparameter 0 Flow rate lower limit
(kmol/hr)
Continued overleaf…

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Global Parameters • 11-3

MWw hidden realparameter 18.015 Molecular weight of water
(kg/kmol)
CPw hidden realparameter 75.4425 Specific heat capacity of
water (kJ/kmol/K)
large hidden realparameter 1.00E+30 large value
vconst hidden realparameter 27.3 Valve constant
vconst2 hidden realparameter 2.14E-03 Valve sizing constant
vconst5 hidden realparameter 2.14E-03 Valve sizing constant
del_Vl hidden realparameter -0.005 Volume lower limit (fraction
of range)
del_Vu hidden realparameter -0.005 Volume upper limit (fraction
of range)
del_Pl hidden realparameter 0.0001 Pressure lower limit ramping
range (bar)
del_Pu hidden realparameter 5 Pressure upper limit ramping
range (bar)
del_Fl hidden realparameter -0.005 Lower flow rate range for
ramping (kmol/hr)
del_Fu hidden realparameter -0.005 Upper flow rate range for
ramping (kmol/hr)
V_heel hidden realparameter -0.001 Fractional volume of heel in
vessel
Delta_t hidden realparameter 5 Temperature differences (C)
eps hidden realparameter 1.00E-05 For linearizing square root
and log functions
P_std hidden realparameter 1.01325 Standard pressure (bar) for
std. liq. vol. calc.
T_std hidden realparameter 15.55561 Standard temperature (C) for
std. liq. vol. calc.
TAmb Temperature 10 Ambient Temperature

11-4 • Global Parameters Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

12 Procedures

Procedure pChairX
Compute "chair" function and "excess" function:
call (Y1, Y2) = pChairX (YR, X, YMAX, XMINF,
XMAX, DXFL, DXFU, TYPE);

Mathematical Input Description

Description YR Required value of Y
X Input variable
YMAX Maximum value of excess
XMINF Lower trigger value of X
XMAX Upper trigger value of X
DXFL Lower ramping range
DXFU Upper ramping range
TYPE Type of input variable (0=Pressure, 1=Liquid Volume)

Output Description
Y1 Actual value of Y
Y2 Excess (overflow)

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Procedures • 12-1

 If X < XMIN: Y1 = 0 (limit)
Chair Function If XMIN < X < XLOW: Y1 = YR*(X-XMIN)/DXL

(ramp)
If X > XLOW: Y1 = YR (normal)

Where:
XLOW = XMIN + DXL

XMIN = XMINF if XMINF is positive

XMIN = -XMINF*XMAX if XMINF is negative
(strictly negative)

DXL = DXFL if DXLF is positive

DXL = -DXFL*(XMAX-XMIN) if DXFL is negative

Exces Function If X < XUP: Y2 = 0 (normal)

If X > XUP:Y2 = (X-XUP)/DXU*YMAX (vent)
Where:
XUP = XMAX - DXU

DXU = DXFU if DXFU is positive

DXU = -DXFU*(XMAX - XMIN) if DXFU is negative
The TYPE argument changes the message printed when Y2 is not
zero.

Usage
This procedure has 2 output arguments, typically the availability
Av, and an vent flowrate Fl_over or Fv_vent.

// liquid case
Liquid Case call (Av, Fl_over) = pchairx (1.0, Vl, F_max,
V_heel, V, del_Vl, del_Vu, 1);

F_max is 1e6
V_heel is -0.001
del_Vl is -0.005
del_Vu is -0.005
This gives XMIN = V*0.001

12-2 • Procedures Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

 So this means that Av will be equal to 1 as long as Vl is greater
than XLOW = 0.005*(V - 0.001 V) = 0.00495*V. It will be
ramped down to 0, to reach 0 when Vl is equal to 0.001 V.
For the excess case, Fl_over will be equal to 0 as long as Vl is
smaller than XUP = V - 0.005*(V - 0.001 V) = 0.995*V.

// vapor case
Vapor Case call (Av, Fv_vent) = pchairx (1.0, P, F_max,
P_min, P_max, del_Pl, del_Pu, 0);

What is the This is a variable that vary from 0 to 1. The normal case is that it is
Availability (Av)? equal to 1. For a flow driven simulation, instead of having the user
specifying directly the flowrate F, we specify the "required"
flowrate FR. The two variables are related by:
F = Av*FR;
If Av is equal to 1, F is simply equal to FR. For feed streams, Av is
actually fixed to 1. For the case of a liquid stream from a vessel
(i.e. a Flash2 block), Av is related to the liquid level. As the liquid
level becomes too low, Av is ramped down to 0. This means that
regardless of the value of FR, the actual flowrate F is zero, which
prevents trying to remove more liquid from the vessel that is
practically empty.
For the pressure driven case, the principle is similar. The
flow/pressure drop relation is based not on F but on FR. As Av
goes down to zero, the actual pressure difference to drive the flow
has then to increase dramatically, which has the effect of stopping
the flow, thus preventing the removal of further liquid from the
empty vessel.

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Procedures • 12-3

12-4 • Procedures Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide
Index

Lead_lag 9-10
A Multiply 9-12
Noise 9-12
Algorithms 9-24, 9-25, 9-36, 9-37
PID 9-14, 9-28
PRBS 9-45
B
Ratio 9-47
Bursting disk model 10-2 Scale 9-48
SplitRange 9-49
C SteamPtoT 9-51
Catalyst deactivation 6-26, 6-32 Sum 9-52
Catalyst heat transfer 6-36 time units 9-2
Choking 7-13 Transform 9-52
Closed loop tuning 9-26 Valve_dyn 9-53
Column models Cooling options 6-33, 6-34
about 5-1
Distl 5-2 D
Extract 5-3 Dead_time model 9-3
RadFrac 5-4, 5-24 Decanter model 3-15
Comparator model 9-2 DeltaP model 10-38
Compartmentation 5-2 Discretize model 9-3
Compr model 7-2 Disengagement 6-25, 6-32
Compressor types 7-2 Distl model 5-2
Continuous stirred tank reactor (CSTR) 6-17 Draining of trays 5-44
Contraction equations (pipe) 10-8 Dupl model 8-2
Control models 9-1
Comparator 9-2 E
Dead_time 9-3
Edmister approach 5-2
Discretize 9-3
Entrainment in separators
Feedforward 9-4
Flash2 3-7
HiLoSelect 9-6
Flash3 3-14
IAE 9-7
Equipment heat transfer 7-23
ISE 9-8
Decanter model 3-19
Lag_1 9-9
Flash2 model 3-7

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Index • 1

 Flash3 model 3-14 RCSTR model 6-24
HeatX model 4-8 Hydraulic calculations 5-18, 5-38, 5-40
MHeatX model 4-12
Mixer model 2-6 I
RCSTR model 6-22
IAE model 9-7
Expansion equations (pipe) 10-6, 10-10, 10-
ISE model 9-8
11
Expansion model 10-4
K
Extract model 5-3
Kinetics 6-17, 6-33
F
L
Faceplates for PID model 9-25, 9-38
Feedforward model 9-4 Lag_1 model 9-9
Flash2 model 3-2 Langmuir-Hinshelwood kinetics 6-17, 6-33
Flash3 model 3-8 Lead_lag model 9-10
Fortran 6-30, 6-35 LHHW reaction equations 6-3
Francis weir equation 5-41, 5-43 Liquid head
FSplit model 2-7 Decanter model 3-16
Flash2 model 3-2
G Flash3 model 3-9
Mixer model 2-3
GlobalTimeScalar 9-2
Radfrac model 5-6, 5-26
Liquid pressure 6-18
H
Liquid volume fraction
Heat exchange 6-32 Decanter model 3-18
Heat exchanger models Flash2 model 3-6
about 4-1 Flash3 model 3-12
Heater 4-2 Mixer model 2-6
HeatX 4-3 RCSTR model 6-22
MHeatX 4-9 RGibbs model 6-16
Heat transfer RStoic model 6-8
Flash2 model 3-6 RYield model 6-12
Flash3 model 3-13
HeatX model 4-5 M
RCSTR model 6-21, 6-31
Manipulator models for streams 8-1
RGibbs model 6-16
Mass 6-28
RStoic model 6-8
MaterialStream model 1-2
RYield model 6-12
MCompr model 7-4
Heater model 4-2
MHeatX model 4-9
Heating 6-24
Mixer model 2-2
HeatStream model 1-5
Mixers 2-2
HeatX model 4-3
Mult model 8-2
HiLoSelect model 9-6
Multiply model 9-12
Holdup
Murphree efficiency 5-4, 5-24
HeatX model 4-4
MHeatX model 4-9

2 • Index Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

N Compr 7-2
Noise model 9-12 MCompr 7-4
Pipe 7-21
O Pump 7-7
Valve 7-12
Orifice model 10-12 Pressure drop calculations 5-18, 5-38, 5-40
Pressure relief
P Pipe model 7-24
Performance and efficiency curves 7-8 Pressure relief models
Performance curves about 10-1
Compr model 7-2 Bursting Disk 10-2
MCompr model 7-5 DeltaP 10-38
PID control model 9-14, 9-28 Expansion model 10-4
faceplates 9-25, 9-38 Orifice 10-12
tuning 9-26 PSV 10-13
PID model Throttle Valve 10-36
faceplates 9-25, 9-38 Pressure relief systems
Pipe expansion equations 10-6, 10-10, 10-11 Flash2 model 3-3
Pipe model Flash3 model 3-9
about 7-21 Mixer model 2-3
equations 7-28 Radfrac model 5-13, 5-32
equipment heat transfer 7-23 RCSTR model 6-22
initializing 7-26 Pressure Safety Valve model
pressure-flow effects 7-21 see PSV model 10-15
results 7-27 Pressure-flow effects
specifying 7-23 Compr model 7-2
Pipeline Decanter model 3-16
Pipe model 7-21 Distl model 5-2
Piping networks 10-2 Dupl model 8-2
Power law 6-17, 6-33 Extract model 5-3
Power Law 5-46 Flash2 model 3-2
Power law reaction equations 6-2 Flash3 model 3-9
PRBS model 9-45 Fsplit model 2-7
Pressure 6-27 Heater model 4-2
Pressure and level control HeatX model 4-4
Flash2 model 3-3 Mcompr model 7-5
Flash3 model 3-10 MHeatX model 4-10
Mixer model 2-4 Mixer model 2-2
RadFrac model 5-8, 5-28 Mult model 8-2
RCSTR model 6-19 Pipe model 7-21
RGibbs model 6-14 Pump model 7-11
RStoic model 6-6, 6-10 Radfrac model 5-5, 5-26
Pressure and Level control RCSTR model 6-17
Decanter (level control only) 3-16 RGibbs model 6-13
Pressure changer models RPlug model 6-34
about 7-1 RStoic model 6-5

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Index • 3

 RYield model 6-9 equations 6-31
Selector model 8-2 initializing 6-26
Sep model 3-19 pressure-flow effects 6-17
Sep2 model 3-20 results 6-30
Procedures reverse flow 6-20
pChairX 12-1 specifying 6-20
PSV model user Fortran 6-30
about 10-13 Reaction models
characteristics equations 10-35 about 6-1
flow equations 10-24 RCSTR 6-17
initializing 10-22 RGibbs 6-13
results 10-23 RPlug 6-33
reverse flow 10-14 RStoic 6-5
specifying component list 10-15 RYield 6-9
specifying flow equation 10-15 Reactor geometry
specifying hysteresis 10-17 RCSTR model 6-20, 6-24
specifying opening characteristics 10-21 RGibbs model 6-15
specifying valid phases 10-15 RStoic model 6-7
specifying viscosity 10-22 RYield model 6-11
viscosity correction equations 10-35 Redistributors 5-45
Pump model 7-7 References
columns 5-2, 5-23
R pressure relief 10-40
relief valves 10-18
RadFrac model
Reset windup, defined 9-22, 9-37
about 5-4, 5-24
Reverse flow
hydraulics and reactions 5-46
Bursting Disk 10-3
pressure-flow effects 5-5, 5-26
Decanter 3-17
redistributors 5-45
DeltaP 10-38
type of dynamics 5-4, 5-24
Expansion 10-5
RadFrac model (equations)
Flash2 3-4
choosing calculation method 5-18, 5-38
Flash3 3-10
draining 5-44
FSplit 2-7
packing 5-44
Heater 4-2
packing hydraulics 5-42
MaterialStream 1-2
packing pressure drop flow 5-42
MHeatX 4-10
tray hydraulics 5-41
Mixer 2-4
tray pressure drop flow 5-41
Mult model 8-2
tray rating 5-43
Orifice 10-12
RadFrac model (specifying)
Pipe 7-22
dynamic simulations 5-15, 5-34
PSV 10-14
heat transfer coefficient 5-13, 5-32
RCSTR 6-20
pressure relief 5-13, 5-32
Throttle Valve 10-36
Ratio model 9-47
Valve 7-13
RCSTR model
RGibbs model 6-13
about 6-17
RPlug model 6-33

4 • Index Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide

RStoic model 6-5 RGibbs 6-15
RYield model 6-9 RPlug 6-36
RStoic 6-7
S RYield 6-10
Throttle Valve 10-36
Scale model 9-48
Workstream 1-6
Selector model 8-2
SplitRange model 9-49
Sep model 3-19
Splitters 2-7
Sep2 model 3-20
Stagnation pressure 10-15
Signals
Standard deviation 9-13
adding 9-52
SteamPtoT model 9-51
comparing 9-2
Stichlmair 5-44
dead time 9-3
Stoichiometric reactors 6-5
discretizing 9-3
Stream models
error analysis 9-7
about 1-1
lag 9-9
HeatStream 1-5
multiplying 9-12
MaterialStream 1-2
noise 9-12
WorkStream 1-6
randon generation 9-45
Streams
ratios 9-47
manipulator models 8-1
scaling 9-48
separation 3-19
selecting high or low 9-6
Sum model 9-52
splitting range 9-49
transforms 9-52
T
Specifying dynamic models
Bursting Disk 10-3 Temperature
Compr 7-4 RCSTR model 6-27
Decanter 3-18 Temperature control 6-19
DeltaP 10-38 Temperature difference driving force 6-34
Distl 5-2 Throttle Valve model 10-36
Expansion 10-5 Time units 9-2
Extract 5-3 TimeScalar 9-2
Flash2 3-5 Transform model 9-52
Flash3 3-11 Tray hydraulics equation 5-41
Heater 4-3 Tray rating calculations 5-43
HeatStream 1-6
HeatX 4-8 U
MaterialStream 1-3
Using the ISE and IAE Models with a PID
MCompr 7-7
Controller 9-27, 9-44
MHeatX 4-11
Mixer 2-5
V
Orifice 10-12
Pipe 7-23 Valve model 7-12
PSV 10-15 Valve_dyn model 9-53
Radfrac 5-15, 5-34 Vessel geometry
RCSTR 6-20 Decanter model 3-18
Flash2 model 3-5

Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide Index • 5

 Flash3 model 3-12
Mixer model 2-5
Viscosity 10-22, 10-35
Volume fraction 6-29

W
WorkStream model 1-6

Z
Ziegler-Nichols technique 9-26

6 • Index Aspen Dynamics Reference Guide